JP2018061737A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a technique capable of reducing a program capacity of a control device.SOLUTION: In a power-on process and a shooting position designation control process, a shooting position designation command is generated on the basis of a shooting position designation flag (Step S316, Step S318). A main control device 70 does not change a value of the shooting position designation flag, stores it in the shooting position designation command, and transmits the shooting position designation command to a performance control device 124. Therefore, as compared with the conventional method in which the value of the shooting position designation flag is changed and then stored in the shooting position designation command, the process of generating the shooting position designation command can be simplified, and as a result, the capacity of the main control device 70 can be reduced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to control of a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of reducing the capacity of a program of a main control control board is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-109982

  However, further reduction of the program capacity is desired in the above-described prior art gaming machine control device.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of reducing the capacity of a program of a control device.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above-described problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution includes a control device that controls a game, and whether the control device should fire a game ball in a first game area according to the progress of the game. Determining whether or not to shoot a game ball in a second game area different from the area, and setting the determined content in a launch position designation flag; launching without changing the value of the launch position designation flag A gaming machine comprising firing position designation information transmitting means for storing in the position designation information and transmitting the launch position designation information to a control device different from the control device.

In this solution, the game proceeds in the following flow.
(1) The control device controls the game. The control device is a device that becomes the center of the control operation, and controls the overall operation of the gaming machine.

(2) The control device of (1) above may determine whether or not a game ball should be fired in the first game area (left-handed area) according to the progress of the game, or a second game area (right-handed) different from the first game area. It is determined whether or not a game ball should be fired in (region), and the determined content is set in the firing position designation flag. For example, when it is determined that a game ball should be fired in the first game area, when “00H” is set in the launch position designation flag and it is determined that the game ball should be fired in the second game area, “20H” is set in the launch position designation flag.

(3) The control device of (1) stores the launch position designation information (launch position designation command) in the launch position designation information without changing the value of the launch position designation flag of (2), and sends the launch position designation information to the control device ( For example, it transmits to the control device (for example, production control device) different from the main control device.

  Thus, according to this solution, the control device stores the launch position designation flag in the launch position designation information without changing the value, and transmits the launch position designation information to another control device. Compared with the conventional method of storing the launch position designation information after changing the position designation flag value, the process of generating the launch position designation information can be simplified, resulting in a reduction in the capacity of the control device. can do.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution is the game machine according to any one of the solutions described above, wherein the control device provides a game ball to the second game area when the value of the launch position designation flag is a special value. A firing position designation display means for displaying a mode indicating that it should be fired, and when the firing position designation flag setting means determines that a game ball should be launched into the second game area, the firing position; A gaming machine characterized by setting a value for specifying the launch position designation display means in a designation flag.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) When the value of the launch position designation flag is a special value (20H), the control device performs a display (lighting display) of an aspect indicating that a game ball should be launched into the second game area. Display means (firing position designation lamp LED) is provided.

(2) When the launch position designation flag setting means determines that the game ball should be launched into the second game area, the launch position designation flag includes the above display means including all other display means in the launch position designation flag. A value for specifying the firing position designation display means (value (20H) for identifying the firing position designation lamp LED) of (1) is set. That is, “20H” is a value that depends on the hardware configuration for identifying the launch position designation lamp LED.

  As described above, according to the present solution, when it is determined that the game ball should be fired in the second game area, a value (launch position designation) for specifying the firing position designation display means in the firing position designation flag. Since the value for specifying the lamp LED (20H)) is set, the value for specifying the launch position designation display means can be used as it is for the launch position designation information, and the control process is simplified by unifying the set values, The capacity of the control device can be reduced.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present solution may be any one of the solutions described above, wherein the launch position designation information transmitting means is configured when the control device is turned on or when the value of the launch position designation flag is changed. A game machine characterized by transmitting launch position designation information.

  According to this solution, since the launch position designation information is transmitted when the power of the control device is turned on or when the value of the launch position designation flag changes, it is only possible to realize the transmission of the minimum necessary launch position designation information. As a result, by simplifying the control process at the time of transmission, the capacity of the control device can be reduced.

  According to the present invention, the capacity of the program of the control device can be reduced.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a subcommand set process at the time of power-on (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a subcommand set process at the time of power-on (2/2). It is a figure which shows the program of the subcommand set process at the time of power-on of embodiment. It is a figure which shows the program (comparative example) of a subcommand set process at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the launch position designation | designated flag and launch position designation command of embodiment and a comparative example. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of switch management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening excess winnings monitoring process (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a large winning a prize mouth excess winnings monitoring process (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a byte counter subtraction selection process. It is a figure which shows a part of program of the big winning opening excessive winning prize monitoring process. It is a figure which shows the program (1st example) of a byte counter subtraction process. It is a figure which shows the program (2nd example) of a byte counter subtraction process. It is a figure which shows the program (comparative example) of a byte counter subtraction process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special game management process. It is a figure which shows the open | release operation | movement pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the setting content, such as opening time of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop symbol selection table at the time of the 1st special symbol big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process during special symbol stop display (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the process during a special symbol stop display (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a byte data selection process. It is a figure which shows a part of program of the special symbol stop display process. It is a figure which shows the special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data table. It is a figure which shows a special electric accessory designation | designated data table. It is a figure which shows the program (1st example) of a byte data selection process. It is a figure which shows the program (2nd example) of a byte data selection process. It is a figure which shows the program (comparative example) of a byte data selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an opening time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a word data selection process. It is a figure which shows the program of an opening time setting process. It is a figure which shows the opening time data 1 table. It is a figure which shows the program (embodiment) of a byte data selection process. It is a figure which shows the program (comparative example) of a word data selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a dynamic port output process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a big win time variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit time start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening big opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning prize closing opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening / closing operation | movement process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal symbol change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the determination process per normal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a double byte selection process. It is a figure which shows the program of the determination process for normal symbol. It is a figure which shows the normal symbol low probability time determination table and the normal symbol high probability time determination table. It is a figure which shows the selection determination table for normal symbols. It is a figure which shows the program (embodiment) of a double byte selection process. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of a normal symbol determination selection table, a normal symbol low probability time determination table, and a normal symbol high probability time determination table. It is a figure which shows the program (comparative example) of a double byte selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a prize frequency abnormal error determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a word counter subtraction process. It is a figure which shows the program of a prize frequency abnormality error determination process. It is a figure which shows the program (1st example) of a word counter subtraction process. It is a figure which shows the program (2nd example) of a word counter subtraction process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the value of RWM at the time of calling a word counter subtraction process, and a flag. It is a figure which shows the program (comparative example) of a byte counter subtraction process. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when winning is obtained by the 1st special symbol lottery in normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when a win is obtained by the 2nd special symbol lottery in fireworks rush or coast mode. It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuation figure showing the flow of reach production (super reach production) performed at the time of big hit (winning). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of fireworks rush. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of a production of coast mode. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  Further, a cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape projecting from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at the lower position of the upper plate 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model connected to the CR unit). It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is installed in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is located in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52 are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like). In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In addition, an effect switching button 45 is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pressing the effect switching button 45, or is changing the symbol, displaying the big hit, or playing the big hit game. It is possible to generate a certain effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.).

  Further, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means, rotary selector). The player can change the contents of the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, for example, by rotating the jog dial 45a.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is used for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. In addition, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal that is also installed in the island facility, thereby securing the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate. With the game board unit 8 fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-described game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (not indicated by reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left part of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in a normal game state (low probability non-time shortened state), and the right part of the game area 8a is an advantageous game state (big hit game state) The second game area (right-handed area, specific area) used in a small hit game state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, or the like. The game ball is guided to the second game area by a distribution area 19e (a launch rail, a ceiling part of the game area, a guide part, etc.) related to a route for distribution to the second game area. Further, in the game area 8a, the middle start winning opening 26, the starting gate 20, the normal winning openings 22, 24, the variable starting winning apparatus 28, the first variable winning apparatus 30 (variable winning apparatus, Lower special electric accessory), second variable winning device 31 (variable pitching device, upper special electric accessory), distribution unit 200 and the like are distributed. The start gate 20 generates a lottery opportunity for an operation lottery (normal symbol lottery) by passing a game ball guided from the circulation area to the right-handed area as a main target.

  Among these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged at the center of the lower part of the game area 8a. The start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31, the distribution unit 200, the normal winning port 24, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged on the right side of the game area 8a. Here, the distribution unit 200 is disposed downstream of the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 is disposed downstream of the distribution unit 200. Furthermore, the left three normal winning holes 22 are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the right normal winning hole 24 is a position where a game ball that has passed through the left route of the sorting unit 200 can enter. Is arranged.

Further, four obstacle nails are arranged above the variable start winning device 28, and further, a ball entrance 19a and a discharge port 19b are arranged above the nail. The ball inlet 19a and the outlet 19b are connected by a communication passage on the back side (not shown). The game ball that has entered the entrance 19a is decelerated and rectified through this communication passage, and is released from the exit 19b.
Further, an out port 19c (predetermined entrance) is arranged on the right side of the start gate 20. The game ball released from the discharge port 19b basically falls straight and passes through the start gate 20, but enters the out port 19c when it is flipped to the right by the obstacle nail.

  At the top of the game area, there is an entrance area (for example, a line of passages formed in the upper part of the rendering unit 40) for guiding the movement direction of the game ball launched toward the upper part of the game area to the right-handed area A flow area 19e based on a section having an inlet area and an outlet area (for example, the discharge port 19b) is formed.

  The game balls thrown into the game area 8a enter the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22, 24, pass through the start gate 20, and the variable start winning apparatus at the time of operation. 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation.

  Here, there is a possibility that game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8 a mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or enter the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area of the game area 8a enters the entrance 19a and is released from the exit 19b, and mainly passes through the start gate 20 or enters the out entrance 19c. There is a possibility of entering the variable start winning device 28 at the time of operation or entering the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the opening operation, and then enters the sorting unit 200.

  The game balls distributed to the left route by the distribution unit 200 may enter the normal winning opening 24 or enter the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation. Further, the game balls distributed to the right route by the distribution unit 200 may enter the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation.

  The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device. The game balls that have entered the device 31 and the out port 19c are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (the board surface), when a game ball is to enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, an area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed) It is necessary to drive a game ball into the area (so-called “left-handed” is executed).

  On the other hand, when a game ball is to be placed in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning port 24, the right side region (right-handed region) in the game region 8a. ) To play a game ball (perform so-called “right-handed”).

  In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly. It is possible to enter the right start winning opening 28a (predetermined entrance) (normal electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with an opening / closing member 28b that is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower edge portion as a hinge. In the state shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 28b is in an upright state (retreat position), making it difficult for the game ball to enter the right start winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to the front side (driving position), the opening / closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a. The variable start winning device 28 is a tongue-type device that moves from the position where the opening / closing member is retracted to the back of the board surface to a position protruding to the near side of the board surface to open the right start winning opening. May be. The variable start winning device 28 may be a so-called tulip type device.

  The first variable winning device 30 described above is a case where a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit or small-hit manner) and a predetermined first condition (for example, a 16-round probability variable symbol 1). The game is activated when a winning symbol other than the above (a condition that a small game is released) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first grand prize opening 30b (upper major prize opening). (Special electric accessory, first special entry event generating means).

  The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26 (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The first variable winning device 30 is a device of a type in which the opening / closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by, for example, a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side. At this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 30a. Is not possible (the first big prize opening 30b is closed). When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is drawn into the board surface, and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and can generate an event of entering the first big winning opening 30b.

  The second variable winning device 31 is the same as the first variable winning device 30 when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode), and a predetermined second condition (for example, Operates when the 16-round probability variation symbol 1 winning symbol) is satisfied, and enables entry into the second grand prize opening 31b (lower grand prize opening) (special electric accessory, first 2 Special entry event generation means).

  The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged upstream of the distribution unit 200 (so-called upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a device of a type in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). The opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by, for example, a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). The opening / closing member 31a is in the closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface to the player side. At this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. Cannot enter the ball (the second large winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is drawn into the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible, and can generate an event of entering the second large winning port 31b.

  In addition, a guide passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 in the downstream direction is disposed inside the second variable winning device 31. The guide passage 31c extends downward and to the left from the entrance of the second big prize opening 31b.

  A second count switch 85 is disposed upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a discharge port 31f is disposed downstream of the guide passage 31c.

  The game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is first detected by the second count switch 85, passes through the guide passage 31c, and is led to the discharge port 31f.

[Distributing unit (sorting device)]
A distribution unit 200 is disposed between the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Among the right-handed game balls, game balls that have not entered the distribution port 200, the variable start winning device 28, and the second variable winning device 31 enter the sorting unit 200.

  The distribution unit 200 has an inflow portion 200i into which a game ball guided to the right-handed region via the distribution region 19e flows, and the game ball that has flowed into the inflow portion 200i is converted into an electric or mechanical distribution body. The first discharge port 200o1 (first discharge portion) that discharges toward the first place (the lower left side of the sorting unit 200) of the right-handed region at the distribution ratio determined in advance by 202 or the second of the right-handed region This unit distributes to any one of the second discharge ports 200o2 (second discharge portions) that discharge toward a place (lower right side of the distribution unit 200). When the electric distribution body 202 is employed, a distribution body that always operates in a constant operation pattern from the time of power-on can be used. When the mechanical distribution body 202 is employed, a plurality of peripheral surfaces are provided. It is possible to use a rotating body that has a vertical rotation.

  The distribution ratio of the distribution unit 200 can be arbitrarily set such as an equal ratio or an unequal ratio. In this embodiment, the distribution ratio of the distribution unit 200 is set to a ratio of 1: 3. For this reason, assuming that four game balls enter the sorting unit 200, three of them are distributed to the right route, and the remaining one game ball is distributed to the left route. It is done. For this reason, when a game ball enters the sorting unit 200, one game ball enters the normal winning opening 24.

And the normal winning opening 24 is arrange | positioned under the 1st discharge port 200o1 (lower left side of the distribution unit 200).
Further, the first variable winning device 30 is disposed downstream of the second discharge port 200o2 (lower right side of the sorting unit 200).

  In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the center position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inner side. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a stunning operation by emitting transmitted light from, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) Can be added.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the interior of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, a decorative object imitating a plant). The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to the effects using these movable bodies 40f, appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images can be exhibited.

  A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction.

  An inflow passage 40g is formed at a substantially central position of the rolling stage 40e, and game balls can randomly flow into the inflow passage 40g from the rolling stage 40e. The inflow passage 40g is formed by extending the lower edge portion of the effect unit 40 downward and then bent in an L shape toward the front side, and a ball discharge port 40h is formed at the end thereof. The ball discharge port 40h is opened toward the front surface, and the opening position is located directly above the middle start winning port 26. For this reason, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow passage 40g from above the rolling stage 40e is discharged from the ball discharge port 40h and easily enters the middle start winning port 26 just below it.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning ports are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. In addition, the game area includes game balls that have entered the normal winning ports 22, 24, the middle starting winning port 26, the right starting winning port 28a, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the out port 19c. All game balls that have been driven into the 8a are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower left position in the window 4a, for example, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  Each time the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of the passage that triggers the operation lottery. Every time (up to a maximum of four), the change of the normal symbol is started every time the change of the normal symbol is started. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state in which the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display, for example, a change state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or second special symbol by 7 segment LED (with dots), respectively. (Symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after being incremented by one in the sense of memorizing that a game ball has entered the middle start winning opening 26 every time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26. It changes to a mode (up to a maximum of 4), and changes to the display mode after being reduced one by one each time the change of the special symbol is triggered by the entry. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is incremented by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, it stores that the game ball has entered the right start winning port 28a. Change to the display mode (up to 4), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry, the display mode is changed by 1 each. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the middle start winning opening 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball enters, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started. It represents the number of times.

  The game state display device 38 includes LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a1, 38a2, 38a3, 38a4, 38a5, probability variation state display lamps 38d, time-short state display lamps 38e, and launch position designation lamps 38f. It is. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol are described. The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer, control device) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Have. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a medium start winning port 26, a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 corresponding to the middle start winning port switch 80 and the right start winning port, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each start winning port switch 80, 82 is for detecting the entrance of a game ball into the middle start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port 28a). The first count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Furthermore, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 (second big winning port 31b) and counting the number thereof.

  Similarly, the game board unit 8 includes a first winning port switch 86 for detecting a game ball entering the normal winning port 22 and a second winning port switch for detecting a game ball entering the normal winning port 24. 81 (detection means). In addition, although the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 is given as an example for the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side, for example, three winning opening switches are installed, and the game balls for the respective normal winning openings 22 are arranged. Incoming balls may be detected individually.

  In any case, winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In this embodiment, the winning board detection signal from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning port switch 86, and the second winning port switch 81 is, It is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, a connection terminal and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 includes the ordinary electric prize solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, and the first corresponding to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. Two major winning opening solenoids 97 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 operate (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close operations (activate) the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. Let Note that these solenoids 88, 90, 97 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal plate 87.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided (payout means). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with a prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout motor substrate (for example, a stepping motor or payout means) is installed together with a payout device substrate 100. The payout device substrate 100 has a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Is provided. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The award balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with game balls, the game balls that have been paid out more than those are described above. Into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the launch control board 108. A ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Moreover, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of launching game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8a as described above. Note that the game ball is fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal thereof. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Is done. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when a CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch control board is also used. The drive circuit 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a lending / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display of a frequency display section (7-segment LED for 3 digits). In addition, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending / return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended. And the return switch board 123 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 to the CR unit. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium). Display for urging the user to input.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or a process of actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via a communication harness (not shown), for example. However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus widths of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is a sound generator incorporating a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), for example, and this acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the glass frame speakers 54 and 55 and the outer frame speaker 56. Sound output.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame lighting board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 pass through the glass frame lighting board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. The effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. The Further, a jog dial 45 a is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45 a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. In addition, although the example which connected the production | presentation switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given here, when installing a saucer illumination board, the production switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are attached to the saucer illumination board. It may be connected.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes the production control using the various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and the production control by the image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in a frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is expanded based on the buffered image data. Drive individually.

  In addition, a power control unit 162 (power control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are externally transmitted from the external terminal plate 160 via the payout control device 92. Is output. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  6 and 7 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power-off occurrence.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. Decrease effect command, number-of-times counter remaining command, special game state designation command, special figure 1 hold designation command, special figure 2 hold designation command, launch position designation command, power-on special phase designation command, customer waiting designation command, etc. ). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, right-handed suggestion effect, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting. Examples of commands include a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination production command, a production command when the number of working memories increases, a production command when the number of working memories decreases, a remaining count counter command, a special gaming state There are a designation command, a special figure 1 hold designation command, a special figure 2 hold designation command, a launch position designation command, a power-on special phase designation command, a customer waiting designation command, and the like. Upon receiving the launch position designation command, the effect control device 124 can execute a left-hand suggestion effect or a right-hand suggestion effect based on the content of the launch position designation command.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 7 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power cut-off occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big prize opening solenoid 97, etc., and then backs up the work area of the RAM 76. The entire contents except the validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer are backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores an effective value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 14). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. The reason why step S120 is executed after interrupts are prohibited in step S118 is the same as another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 14). ) To prevent the above). In this embodiment, the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster (eg, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (eg, several ms). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 14). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the check condition described above is satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72, in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, and the second big prize opening solenoid 97, the output port corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal. Clear the buffer.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup validity determination flag area.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 6).

[Subcommand set processing at power-on]
9 and 10 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the power-on subcommand set process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  The power-on subcommand set process is a process called in the effect control return process (S111 in FIG. 6) or the effect control output process (S115 in FIG. 6).

  Step S300: The main control CPU 72 executes a model command setting process. When gaming machines with different specifications exist as a series, the contents of the production can be varied depending on the model command.

  Step S302: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (first special symbol operation memory number counter).

  Step S304: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a subcommand (special figure 1 hold designation command).

  Step S306: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for calling a subcommand set process. As a result, a special figure 1 holding designation command reflecting the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter is transmitted. In the subcommand set process, a process for setting a designated command to the subcommand buffer is executed. The set command may be transmitted by the subcommand set process or may be transmitted by another module.

  Step S308: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter (second special symbol operation memory number counter).

  Step S310: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a subcommand (special figure 2 hold designation command).

  Step S312: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for calling a subcommand set process. Thereby, the special figure 2 reservation designation command reflecting the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter is transmitted.

  Step S314: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for calling the number-of-times command set process. By this processing, the time cut counter value command related to the time-short turn-off counter and the probability variable turn-off counter is transmitted.

  Step S316: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the launch position designation flag.

  Step S318: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting a subcommand (launching position designation command). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S320 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S320: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for calling a subcommand set process. As a result, a launch position designation command reflecting the value of the launch position designation flag is transmitted.

  Step S322: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading the special game management phase.

  Step S324: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting a subcommand (power-on special phase designation command).

  Step S326: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for calling a subcommand set process. Thereby, a launch position designation command reflecting the value of the special game management phase is transmitted.

  Step S328: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading the special game management phase.

  Step S330: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for confirming whether or not the value of the special game management phase is not the special symbol variation waiting state designation value (00H).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is not the special symbol change waiting state designation value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the value of the special game management phase is not the special symbol variation waiting state designation value (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is the special symbol variation waiting state designation value, The main control CPU 72 executes step S332.

  Step S332: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the customer waiting effect command request flag.

  Step S334: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a subcommand (customer waiting designation command).

Step S336: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for calling a subcommand set process. As a result, a customer waiting designation command reflecting the value of the customer waiting effect command request flag is transmitted.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a program for power-on subcommand set processing according to the embodiment.

  In this module, an input register (argument), an output register (return value), and a protection register (a register whose value does not change in this module) are not set.

  The first “RST KICMDST” is a process for calling a model command setting process.

  The next “LDQ A, (LOW R_TZ1_MEM)” is a process of loading the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter, and loads the value of R_TZ1_MEM (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter) into the A register.

  The next “LD DE, @ CMD_TZ1_MEM” is a process of setting a subcommand (special figure 1 hold designation command), and loads the value of @ CMD_TZ1_MEM (special figure 1 hold designation command) into the DE register.

  The next “RST SBCMDST” is a process for calling a subcommand set process arranged in the restart area.

  The next “LDQ A, (LOW R_TZ2_MEM)” is a process of loading the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, and loads the value of R_TZ2_MEM (special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter) into the A register.

  The next “LD DE, @ CMD_TZ2_MEM” is a process of setting a subcommand (special figure 2 hold designation command), and loads the value of @ CMD_TZ2_MEM (special figure 2 hold designation command) into the DE register.

  The next “RST SBCMDST” is a process for calling a subcommand set process arranged in the restart area.

  The next “CALLF CTCMDST” is a process for calling the number of times command set process.

  The next “LDQ A, (LOW R_HSY_FLG)” is a process of loading a firing position designation flag, and loads the value of R_HSY_FLG (launching position designation flag) into the A register.

  The next “LD DE, @CMD_HSY_POS” is a process of setting a subcommand (fire position designation command), and loads @CMD_HSY_POS (fire position designation command) into the DE register.

  The next “RST SBCMDST” is a process for calling a subcommand set process arranged in the restart area.

  The next “LDQ A, (LOW R_TOK_PHS)” is a process for loading the special game management phase, and the value of R_TOK_PHS (special game management phase) is loaded into the A register.

  The next “LD DE, @CMD_TOK_PHS” is a process of setting a subcommand (special phase designation command at power-on), and loads the value of @CMD_TOK_PHS (special phase designation command at power-on) into the DE register.

  The next “RST SBCMDST” is a process for calling a subcommand set process arranged in the restart area.

  The next “LDQ A, (LOW R_TOK_PHS)” is a process for loading the special game management phase, and the value of R_TOK_PHS (special game management phase) is loaded into the A register.

  The next “RET NTZ” is a process of returning if it is not the special symbol variation waiting state designation value.

  The next “CLRQ (LOW R_DEM_FLG)” is a process of clearing the customer waiting effect command request flag.

  The next “LD DE, @CMD_DEM_SET” is a process for setting a subcommand (customer waiting designation command), and loads the value of @CMD_DEM_SET (customer waiting designation command) into the DE register.

  The next “RST SBCMDST” is a process for calling a subcommand set process arranged in the restart area.

  The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

[Description of the program]
This module sets the gaming state at power-on as a subcommand.
Specifically, the number of reserved balls, the remaining number of times, etc., a right-handed instruction, a special game management phase (special symbol / hit processing state), and a subcommand relating to a customer waiting instruction are set.

  This module is called when the power is turned on regardless of whether the RWM clear is activated (when the RAM is cleared) or the power is restored.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a program (comparative example) of subcommand set processing at power-on.

  The program of the comparative example is different from the program of the embodiment in that “RLCA instruction” for three lines is added ((1) to (3) in FIG. 12).

  Since the program of the comparative example is a game machine program with a probability variation area, the content of the program is different from that of the game machine with no probability variation area according to the embodiment, but the basic flow is not changed. Further, the program of the comparative example is a program for comparison with the present embodiment, and does not constitute a conventional technique.

The first “RLCA instruction” is a process for calculating the subsequent command addition value, and the value of the launch position designation flag set in the A register by “LDQ A, (LOW R_HSY_FLG)” one line before is set to 1. This is a process of shifting the bit left (a process of rotating to the upper side).
The second “RLCA instruction” is also a process for shifting the value of the launch position designation flag set in the A register to the left by 1 bit.
The third “RLCA instruction” is also a process of shifting the value of the launch position designation flag set in the A register to the left by 1 bit.

  Thus, when “00H” is set in the A register, the value of the A register is not changed by three “RLCA instructions”, and “00H” is finally set in the A register. .

  On the other hand, when “20H” is set in the A register, “40H” is set in the A register by the first “RLCA instruction”, and “80H” is set in the A register by the second “RLCA instruction”. Then, “01H” is set in the A register by the third “RLCA instruction”.

Since the program of the embodiment does not have three “RLCA instructions” like the program of the comparative example, the code amount can be reduced by 3 bytes compared to the program of the comparative example. The “RLCA instruction” is a 1-byte instruction.
In addition, since the same processing is performed in the launch position designation management processing, the code amount can be reduced by a total of 6 bytes in this embodiment.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the launch position designation flag and the launch position designation command according to the embodiment and the comparative example.

Embodiment
In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13A, when “how to strike” is “normal strike (left strike)”, the value of “launch position designation flag” is “00H”, and the firing position designation command The value of is “C0H00H”. “C0H” is a preceding value indicating the type of the “launching position designation flag”, and “00H” is a subsequent value indicating the contents of the “launching position designation flag”.

  Further, when “how to hit” is “right-handed”, the value of the “firing position designation flag” is “20H” and the value of the firing position designation command is “C0H20H”.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the value of the “fire position designation flag” and the value of the subsequent value of the “fire position designation command” are completely the same.

[Comparative example]
In the comparative example, as shown in (B) of FIG. 13, when “how to hit” is “normal hit”, the value of “launch position designation flag” is “00H”, and the value of the launch position designation command is “00”. C0H00H ". This point is the same as in the embodiment.

  On the other hand, when “How to hit” is “Right-handed”, the value of “Fire position designation flag” is “20H”, and the value of the fire position designation command is “C0H01H”.

  Thus, in the comparative example, the value of the “firing position designation flag” and the value of the subsequent value of the “firing position designation command” do not completely match.

[Summary of launch position specification commands]
The main control device 70 should shoot a game ball in the first game area (left-handed area) according to the progress of the game, or place the game ball in a second game area (right-handed area) different from the first game area. It is determined whether or not to fire, and the determined content is set in the firing position designation flag (launching position designation flag setting means). In this embodiment, when it is determined that a game ball should be fired in the first game area, “00H” is set in the launch position designation flag, and it is determined that a game ball should be fired in the second game area. In this case, “20H” is set in the launch position designation flag. Then, main controller 70 stores the launch position designation command in the launch position designation command without changing the value of the launch position designation flag, and transmits the launch position designation command to effect control device 124 (launch position designation information transmitting means).

  In addition, when the value of the launch position designation flag is a special value (20H), main controller 70 provides launch position designation lamp 38f that displays a mode indicating that a game ball should be launched into the second game area. Prepare. When determining that the game ball should be fired in the second game area, main controller 70 sets a value (20H) for identifying launch position designation lamp 38f in the launch position designation flag.

  Furthermore, main controller 70 issues a firing position designation command when main controller 70 is turned on or when the value of the firing position designation flag changes (in the effect control return process, the effect control output process, or the fire position designation management process). Send.

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for permitting an interrupt.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes dynamic port output processing. In the dynamic port output processing, common data set in the common output buffer is output to the output port, and the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, and the second special symbol display device 35 are displayed. The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, and the like are controlled to be turned on.

  In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the special game management process and the normal game management process. The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes port input processing. The port input process is a process of reading various input port information. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning port switch 80, the right starting winning port switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning port switch 86, the second The input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the winning opening switch 81 is read.

  Step S204: The main control CPU 72 executes timer update processing. The timer update process is a process for updating various timer counters.

  Step S205: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S207: The main control CPU 72 executes switch management processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, and the right starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch management process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. Note that processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S208, Step S209: The main control CPU 72 executes special game management processing and normal game management processing during the interrupt management processing. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among these, in the special game management process (step S208), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. 2 Controls the display of fluctuation and stop by the special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. The details of the special game management process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal game management process (step S209), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Or control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (determined random number per normal symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch management process (step S207), and in this normal game management process A random number value is read from the memory, and it is determined whether or not the value falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S210: The main control CPU 72 executes state management processing (security management processing). The state management process is a process for performing determination according to various errors and setting according to the error determination result.

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning opening switch process. The winning opening switch process is a process of checking switches such as a general winning opening, a starting winning opening, and a large winning opening, and adding a counter for controlling the corresponding winning ball.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control management process. The payout control management process is a process for generating and outputting a payout command based on the counter value of the winning ball control counter set in the winning opening switch process.

  In this processing, the number of winning balls is instructed to the payout control device 92 based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input processing (step S203). A prize ball instruction command is output.

  Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the contents of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the payout control management process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when a winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, a winning ball content command corresponding to the second profit (four game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

[About the number of prize balls and number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are each set to a specified number of one or more. In addition, the number of prize balls may be different between the start port of the first special symbol and the start port of the second special symbol. In addition, the minimum number of winning balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls (the average number of balls that can be obtained during the period from the start to the end of the time reduction state) May be. Furthermore, the winning probability of special symbols, the expected number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big prize opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. When the condition is satisfied, a big hit may be set such that the number of game balls acquired by one big hit is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 executes a launch position designation management process. In the launch position designation management process, the main control CPU 72 should launch a game ball in the first game area according to the progress of the game (according to the internal state), or in a second game area different from the first game area. It is determined whether or not the game ball should be fired, and the determined content is set in the fire position designation flag (launch position designation flag setting means).

  For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated due to a big hit game or a small hit game, or when the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, etc. The control CPU 72 sets a right-handed value (20H) in the firing position designation flag. In other cases, the main control CPU 72 sets a left-handed value (00H) in the firing position designation flag.

  When the value of the launch position designation flag changes, the main control CPU 72 stores the launch position designation flag after the change in the subsequent value of the launch position designation command without changing the value. It transmits to the production control device 124 (launch position designation information transmission means).

  Further, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f based on the value of the launch position designation flag. When the value (20H) indicating right-handed is set as the value of the firing position designation flag, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. Thereby, when the value of the launch position designation flag is a special value (20H), the launch position designation lamp 38f performs display (lighting display) of an aspect indicating that the game ball should be launched into the second game area. (Launch position designation display means). Note that the launch position designation lamp 38f is turned on from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when the game is shifted to the "time reduced state" through the big hit game, and is not lit ( OFF).

  Step S214: The main control CPU 72 executes an external information management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an external information signal (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) to the hall computer in the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in request buffer.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information management process, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S215: The main control CPU 72 executes a test signal management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S216: The main control CPU 72 executes LED display setting processing. The LED display setting process is a process for setting common data for controlling lighting of various display devices (LEDs) such as the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device in the common output buffer.

  Step S217: The main control CPU 72 executes solenoid data setting processing. The solenoid data setting process is a process for storing various solenoid output data in the output port buffer.

  Step S218: The main control CPU 72 executes port output processing. The port output process is a process for outputting the value of the common output buffer stored in each output port buffer to the output port. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information management process to the port. In addition, the main control CPU 72 combines the drive signals, test signals, etc. of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize winning solenoid 90, and the second big prize winning solenoid 97 stored in the port output request buffer. Output.

  Step S219: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S220: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next interrupt.

[Switch management processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch management process (step S207 in FIG. 14). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the right start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first big winning mouth count process. In the first grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

  Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b and executes the second big winning mouth count process. In the second grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable prize winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operating memory number (normal symbol holding ball number counter) by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in a random number storage area of the RAM 76 (an empty area having a smaller number among the determined random numbers stored 1 to 4 per normal symbol (holding area)). When the normal symbol memory update process is completed, or when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 14).
The main control CPU 72 first acquires a random number per normal symbol, and then checks whether or not the current normal symbol working memory number is less than the upper limit number. This process may be executed by a procedure for storing random values per symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Such a processing procedure can also be applied to the case of acquiring and storing other random numbers (for example, jackpot determination random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, etc.).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 15). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section has a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 15). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled in the dynamic port output process (step S202 in FIG. 14).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (first lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition). Means, element acquisition means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. Are stored as a set (storage means, lottery element storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management phase (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball generated during the big hit.

  Step S37: When the jackpot is not a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. Is.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management processing (FIG. 15).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 15). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 15). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 16), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the dynamic port output process (step S202 in FIG. 14) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (second lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 16) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 16) described above.

  Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, element acquisition). means). The acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 16) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area Are stored as a set (storage means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 16) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management phase (game state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the same incoming ball that occurred during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command for increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 15).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 16 and step S46 in FIG. 17) (preliminary determination). means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 16) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 17). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the “time reduction function” is activated is reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “out of reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a special figure destination determination effect command corresponding to “non-shortening fluctuation time in time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine “reach group (reach type)” from the reach mode random number and generate a special figure destination determination effect command from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is inactive (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normally out of reach reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a change pattern destination determination command for the change pattern at the time of small hit, similarly to the above-described process at the time of loss.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition effect determination process after executing the determination result management process in step S82, and the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16) or the second special symbol. The process returns to the storage update process (FIG. 17). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, if the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to “probability variation”, for example, the probability state schedule flag “A0H” is set. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No Then, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the winning value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes) ), The main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 16) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 17). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and from the result, it is determined whether the jackpot type corresponds to “normal symbol” or “probability variation symbol”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “normal symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents “probability variation symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. As the special symbol destination determination value, for example, “01H” is set when it corresponds to “normal symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probable variation”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the prior hit determination is performed only with the current probability state, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent destination determination based on the immediately preceding destination determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result Is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed, and a comparative value for high probability is set.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 17).

[Monitoring process for excessive winning prizes]
Next, FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are flowcharts showing an example of a procedure for the super-winning prize excess winning monitoring process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.
The over-winning prize winning monitoring process is a process called in the first big winning opening counting process (S20 in FIG. 15) or the second big winning opening counting process (S21b in FIG. 15).

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading the special game management phase.

[Special Game Management Phase]
The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the special game management phase (in the brackets) according to the game progress statuses (1) to (6) corresponding to the special symbol as follows, for example.
(1) Special symbol change waiting state: “00H”
(2) Special symbol changing state: “01H”
(3) Special symbol stop state: “02H”
(4) Special electric equipment waiting to be released: “03H”
(5) State during opening of special electric accessory: “04H (special value for opening control state of big hit big prize opening)”
(6) Special electric accessory closed state: “05H”
(7) State during special electric equipment end time: “06H (special value for end state of big hit big prize winning end)”

Note that the value of the special game management phase can be set as follows, separately during the big hit and during the small hit.
(1) Special symbol change waiting state: “00H”
(2) Special symbol changing state: “01H”
(3) Special symbol stop symbol display state: “02H”
(4) The state before the jackpot big winning opening is released: “03H”
(5) Winning jackpot release control state: “04H”
(6) Winning jackpot closing effective state: “05H”
(7) Closed jackpot winning prize closing weight status: “06H”
(8) The state before the small winning extra opening is released: “07H”
(9) Small winning big prize opening release control state: “08H”
(10) Small winning extra prize closing effective state: “09H”
(11) Close status for closing the big winning prize opening: “0AH”

  The “special symbol variation waiting state” is a state in which a special symbol variation starts when there is a hold. The “special symbol changing state” is a state in which the special symbol is changing. The “special symbol stop symbol display state” is a state in which the variation of the special symbol is finished and the lottery result is being displayed. The “pre-release state of the jackpot big winning opening” is a state in which a special symbol lottery is won (hit) and the operation of the special electric accessory (attacker release) is awaited. The “big hit big prize opening release control state” is a state in which the special electric accessory is in operation. The “big hit big winning opening closing effective state” is a winning effective state after the operation of the special electric accessory. Even if the game ball passes through the count switch in the big prize opening, it is not in an illegal prize. The “hit state of closing the jackpot big prize closing” is a state in which the operation of the special electric accessory is finished.

  The “state before releasing the big hit big prize opening” is a state in which a special symbol lottery is won (small win) and the operation of the special electric accessory (opening of the attacker) is awaited. The “small winning big prize opening release control state” is a state in which the special electric accessory is in operation. The “small winning big winning opening closing effective state” is a winning effective state after the operation of the special electric accessory. Even if the game ball passes through the count switch in the big prize opening, it is not in an illegal prize. The “small winning big prize closing closing weight state” is a state where the operation of the special electric accessory has ended.

  Step S4252: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for confirming the special game management phase.

  Step S4254: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the value of the special game management phase is the big hit big prize opening control state designation value.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is the jackpot big prize opening control state designation value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the value of the special game management phase is the big hit big prize opening control state designation value (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S4256.

  Step S4256: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for confirming the special game management phase.

  Step S4258: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the value of the special game management phase is equal to or greater than the jackpot big prize end weight state designation value.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is equal to or greater than the jackpot big winning end exit weight state designation value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the value of the special game management phase is equal to or greater than the jackpot big winning end exit weight state designation value (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4260.

  Step S4260: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the winning ball counter during closing of the big hit big winning opening.

  Step S4262: The main control CPU 72 executes a byte counter subtraction process. Details of the processing will be described later. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4264 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S4264: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the winning ball counter during closing of the big hit big winning opening is not changed from 1 to 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the winning ball counter during closing of the big hit big winning opening is not changed from 1 to 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the calling source.
On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the value of the winning ball counter during closing of the big hit big winning opening is not changed from 1 to 0 (No), that is, the value of the winning ball counter during closing of the big hit big winning opening changes from 1 to 0. When confirming that it has been performed, the main control CPU 72 executes Step S4266.

  Step S4266: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the large winning opening excess winning number counter.

  Step S4268: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the large winning opening excess winning number counter.

  Step S4270: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value of the excessive winning opening excessive winning counter is less than the excessive winning opening excessive winning error detection determination value.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the large winning opening excessive winning number counter is less than the large winning opening excessive winning error detection determination value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the calling source.
On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the value of the over-winning prize counter is less than the over-winning prize error detection determination value (No), that is, the over-winning counter value of the big prize opening is the big winning mouth When it is confirmed that the value is equal to or greater than the excessive winning error detection determination value, the main control CPU 72 executes step S4272.

  Step S4272: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the large winning opening excess winning number counter.

  Step S4274: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the lower byte (subsequent value) of the subcommand (special prize winning excessive prize error occurrence designation).

Step S4276: The main control CPU 72 executes a security setting process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 executes error determination processing and subcommand generation / transmission processing.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

[Byte counter subtraction selection processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the byte counter subtraction selection process.

  Step S4280: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading the contents of the subtraction target ram.

  Step S4282: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the content of the subtraction target ram is zero.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the subtraction target ram is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the content of the subtraction target ram is 0 (No), that is, when the content of the subtraction target ram is 1 or more, the main control CPU 72 executes Step S4284.

  Step S4284: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for comparing the content of the subtraction target ram with “2 (special value)” (post-comparison flag setting instruction).

Step S4286: The main control CPU 72 executes a process (calculation instruction) for subtracting 1 from the content of the subtraction target ram.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a part of the program for the super-winning prize winning prize monitoring process.
It should be noted that the program for the super-winning prize winning prize winning monitoring process extracts and displays only the part necessary for explanation.

  In the figure, the first four instructions correspond to the winning ball counter updating process during closing of the jackpot big winning opening. The next two commands correspond to a large winning opening excessive winning number counter updating process. The last four commands correspond to processing for excessive winning error at the big winning opening.

  The first “LDQ HL, LOW R_TDO_CNT” is a process of setting the address of the winning ball winning counter during closing the big hit big winning mouth, and the value of the winning ball counter during closing the big hit big winning mouth (LOW R_TDO_CNT) is stored in the HL register. Loads.

  The next “CALLF BYTEDEC” is a process for calling the byte counter subtraction process.

  The next “RET NC” is a process of returning if the winning ball counter during closing of the big hit big winning opening is not changed from “1 → 0”. Specifically, if the value of the carry flag is “0”, the process returns to the caller.

  The next “INC HL” is a process for setting the address of the extra winning mouth excess winning counter. If 1 is added to the current HL register, the address of the extra winning mouth excess winning counter is set.

The next “INC (HL)” is a process of adding 1 to the extra winning mouth excess winning counter.
The next “JCP C, (HL), @TDN_KNK_MAX, TDOVCHK_99” branches to “TDOVCHK — 99: (label)” if the excessive winning slot excessive winning counter is less than the excessive winning slot excessive winning error detection determination value. It is processing.

  The next “LDE, LOW @CMD_ERR_TDO” is a process for setting the lower byte of the subcommand (special designation of occurrence of excessive prize winning over-winning error). In the E register, “over-winning prize over-winning error occurrence designation (@CMD_ERR_TDO ) ”Lower byte.

  The next “RST SEC_SET” is a process for calling a security setting process arranged in the restart area.

  The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

[Description of the program]
Here, a method of using the byte counter subtraction process in the special winning opening excessive winning monitoring process (TDOVCHK) will be described.
The large winning opening excessive winning monitoring process is a process that is called when there is a winning at the large winning opening. This is a process of determining an error state when there are too many winning balls in the time when the winning immediately after the closing of the big winning opening is valid. For example, when the grand prize opening is closed with 10 winnings, it is determined that there is an abnormality when there are 14 or more winnings in total.

  Note that, in a process different from this module (program for super-winning-game over-winning-monitoring process), when the big winning mouth is closed, a judgment value (for example, 4) ) Is set.

  In (1) of FIG. 22, the address of “the winning ball counter during closing the big hit big winning opening” is set in the HL register.

  Thereafter, in (2) in FIG. 22, the byte counter subtraction process is called.

  As a result of calling the byte counter subtraction process, the carry flag is 0 except in the case where the value of the “big hit big prize opening closed winning ball counter” is 1 to 0. ) To return to the caller.

  On the other hand, as a result of calling the byte counter subtraction process, when the value of “the number of winning balls during closing of the big hit big winning opening” becomes 1 to 0, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred because the carry flag is 1. In (3) of FIG. 22, the subsequent processing is continuously executed without returning to the caller.

Briefly explaining the subsequent processing, this abnormality (abnormality that there are 14 or more winnings in one round game) has reached the big winning mouth excessive winning error detection determination value (for example, twice during the big hit) If the error occurs, the security signal is output and the subcommand is set.
The above is an example of the caller of the byte counter subtraction process.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a byte counter subtraction program (first example).

  The input register (argument) is set by the caller, and the subtraction target ram address (for example, the address of the winning ball counter during closing of the big hit big winning opening) is set in the HL register.

  The output register (return value) is set by this module and is referred to by the caller. The content of the target ram before subtraction is set in the A register, and the update result flag value is set in the carry flag of the F register. The update result flag value is set in the zero flag of the F register.

  Protection registers (registers whose values do not change in this module) are a BC register, a DE register, and an HL register.

  The first “LD A, (HL)” is a process of loading the contents of the subtraction target ram, and data stored in the address indicated by the HL register in the A register (for example, the number of winning balls during closing of the big hit big winning opening) Counter).

  The next “RT Z, A” is a process that returns if the content of the subtraction target ram is 0, and returns to the caller if the value of the winning ball number counter during closing of the big hit big winning opening is 0.

  The next “CP 2” is a process of comparing the content of the subtraction target ram with 2 (comparison flag setting instruction).

  The next “DEC (HL)” is a process of subtracting 1 from the content of the subtraction target ram, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning ball counter during closing of the big hit big winning opening (operation instruction).

  The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

[Description of the program]
The byte counter subtraction process is a process called when the timer counter, the number of times, etc. are subtracted.
In the byte counter subtraction process, if the value of the subtraction target ram (RWM) specified by the HL register is 0, the process returns to the calling source without executing any processing, and the value of the subtraction target ram specified by the HL register. If is not 0, the module subtracts 1 from the value of the subtraction target ram. When the value of the subtraction target ram changes from 1 to 0, a flag (carry flag) indicating the change is set.

  The byte counter subtraction process in the large winning opening excessive winning monitoring process (TDOVCHK) is used to subtract the number of balls that may be detected when there is a winning number immediately after the large winning opening is closed. When the value after subtraction changes from 1 to 0, it is determined that excessive winning has occurred.

  In the byte counter subtraction processing of this embodiment, to reduce the code, the use of the “SCF instruction” is avoided, and the “RTZ, A instruction” is used for the return determination to the caller.

  The “RT Z, A instruction” in (1) in FIG. 23 is an instruction that returns to the caller if the value of the A register is 0, and proceeds to the next processing if not. Internally, “OR A instruction” and “RET Z instruction” are executed with the same contents. In this case, the carry flag is always reset, and the zero flag is set if A = 0 and reset if A ≠ 0.

The “CP 2 instruction” in (2) in FIG. 23 is an instruction used because the “SCF instruction” is not used.
Details of the “CP 2 instruction” process will be described below.

(A) When the value of RWM (subtraction target ram) is 0 When the value of RWM is 0, since the process returns to the caller in (1) in FIG. 23, (2) in FIG. 23 is not executed. When returning to the caller, the carry flag is reset and the zero flag is set.

(B) When RWM value is 1 “1” and “2” are compared by “CP 2 instruction”. Since “1 <2”, the carry flag is set and the zero flag is reset. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the RWM value by the “DEC (HL) instruction” in (3) in FIG. Since this instruction does not change the carry flag at all, the carry flag remains set. On the other hand, since the value of RWM has changed from 1 to 0, the zero flag is changed to set. As a result, the carry flag is set and the caller is returned with the zero flag set.

(C) When RWM is 2 “2” and “2” are compared by “CP 2 instruction”. Since “2 = 2”, the carry flag is reset and the zero flag is set. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the RWM value by the “DEC (HL) instruction” in (3) in FIG. Since this instruction does not change the carry flag at all, the carry flag remains reset. On the other hand, since the value of RWM changes from 2 to 1, and the changed result is other than 0, the zero flag is changed to reset. As a result, the carry flag is reset, and the caller returns to the state where the zero flag is also reset.

(D) When the RWM Value is 3 or More Here, the case where the RWM value is “3” will be described. “3” and “2” are compared by “CP 2 instruction”. Since “3> 2”, the carry flag is reset and the zero flag is set. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the RWM value by the “DEC (HL) instruction” in (3) in FIG. Since this instruction does not change the carry flag, the carry flag remains reset. Since the value of RWM changes from 3 to 2, and the changed result is other than 0, the zero flag remains reset. As a result, the carry flag is reset, and the caller returns to the state where the zero flag is also reset.

In summary, the following relationship is obtained.
(A) When the RWM value is 0 The RWM value does not change, the zero flag is set, and the carry flag is reset.
(B) When the RWM value is 1 The RWM value is 0, the zero flag is set, and the carry flag is also set.
(C) When the RWM value is 2 or more The RWM value is decremented by 1, the zero flag is reset, and the carry flag is also reset.

  The byte counter subtraction process may be arranged in the restart area and called by the RST instruction, or may be arranged in an area other than the restart area and called by the CALL instruction.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a byte counter subtraction program (second example).
The difference between the first example and the second example is that the A register of the output register is lost.
There is no change in the contents of the program. The second example is effective when the caller refers to the value of the A register and executes processing.

[Summary of byte counter subtraction processing]
In this way, the byte counter subtraction process (value change confirmation module) compares the value of the predetermined register (A register) with the special data value (2) set in advance, and the value of the predetermined register is the special data. If the comparison result indicates that the value is smaller than the value of, the special flag (carry flag) is set, and the value of the predetermined register is greater than the value of the special data or the value of the predetermined register is the same as the value of the special data If the comparison result indicates that the special flag is reset by executing a post-comparison flag setting instruction (CP 2 instruction) that executes the process of resetting the special flag with one instruction, the special flag is set by the post-comparison flag setting instruction. Indicates that the first value (1) has changed to the second value (0) (the value of the operation target ram has changed from 1 to 0). When the other flag is reset, the module indicates that the first value has not changed to the second value. The main controller 70 includes a byte counter subtraction process (value change confirmation module).

  In addition, the byte counter subtraction process is called in a state where the address of the area in which the calculation target data to be calculated is stored is set in the specified register (HL register) as an argument.

  Further, the byte counter subtraction process sets the value of the special flag (carry flag) in the special register (F register) as a return value (for example, bit 0 of the F register).

  Furthermore, in the byte counter subtraction process, after the post-comparison flag setting instruction (CP 2 instruction) is executed, the value of the operation target data to be calculated (the value of the subtraction target ram) is changed to a predetermined operation instruction (DEC (HL) Command).

  In addition, the byte counter subtraction process returns to the caller without executing any processing when the value of the calculation target data (subtraction target ram) to be calculated is 0, and the calculation target to be calculated If the data value is not 0, a post-comparison flag setting instruction (CP 2 instruction) is executed, and thereafter a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the operation target data to be calculated is executed.

  In addition, the byte counter subtraction process is performed by using the operation value (“1” corresponding to 1 subtraction) calculated by a predetermined operation instruction as the value of the special data (“2” of the CP 2 instruction) and the final value of the predetermined register. A special value (“2”) obtained by adding a value (“1”) immediately before the target value (“0”) is set.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a program (comparative example) for byte counter subtraction processing.
In the byte counter subtraction process of the comparative example, when the value of the subtraction target ram (RWM value) changes from 1 to 0, the SCF instruction is used to set the carry flag. For this reason, a total of 9 bytes were used.

The first “LD A, (HL)” is a process of loading the contents of the subtraction target ram.
The next “OR A” is a process of confirming data.
The next “RET Z” is a process of returning if the data is zero.
The next “DEC (HL)” is a process of subtracting 1 from the contents of the subtraction target ram.
The next “RET NZ” is a process of returning if the subtraction result is not zero.
The next “SCF” is a process for setting a carry flag.
The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

  In the comparative example program, when the carry flag is set, only the idea of using the “SCF instruction” was used, so that the program capacity was increased. In the first and second examples of this embodiment, the “SCF instruction” is used. The carry flag is set using the new idea of not using.

  In the programs of the first and second examples, “LD A, (HL)” is “1 byte”, “RT Z, A” is “1 byte”, and “CP 2” is “2 bytes”. “DEC (HL)” is “1 byte”, “RET” is “1 byte”, and the total program capacity is “6 bytes”.

  On the other hand, in the program of the comparative example, “LD A, (HL)” is “1 byte”, “OR A” is “1 byte”, “RET Z” is “1 byte”, and “DEC” (HL) "is" 1 byte "," RET NZ "is" 1 byte "," SCF "is" 2 bytes "," RET "is" 1 byte ", and the total program capacity Is “8 bytes”.

When comparing the first and second examples with the comparative example, the program capacity of the module is reduced by “2 bytes”.
Further, when the first example, the second example, and the comparative example are compared, the processing time of the module is “about 19% reduction when the RWM value before subtraction is 0 or 1”.

[Special game management processing]
Next, details of the special game management process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 14) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special game management process. The special game management process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a big win variable winning device This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of a management process (step S5000) and a small winning time variable winning device management process (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special game management process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special game management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special game management phase). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special game management phase: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol change pre-process (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change pre-processing has already been completed (special game management phase: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol changing process. Is completed (special game management phase: 02H), the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed by referring to the flag one by one. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner in the previous special symbol stop display process. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the big win time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the big win variable winning device management process, the first big winning port solenoid 90 or the second big winning port solenoid 97 counts a certain time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second or 10 game balls entered). The first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern by being excited for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 16 times). During this time, the game balls are intensively awarded to the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, thereby giving the player an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game). Execution means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 in the case of a big hit is called “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 16 times, these are called “16 rounds”. Sometimes referred to generically. In this way, the big hit game is composed of a plurality of round games (unit games), and an upper limit number related to the number of winning of game balls in one round game is set in each big winning opening. Then, the game balls that exceed the upper limit are over-winned, and the game balls are paid out as usual.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened / closed from the first round to the fifth round, and the seventh round to the sixteenth round, and the second variable prize-winning equipment 31 is opened / closed from the sixth round. ing.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets a big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big winning variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round is set. Alternatively, every time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time shortening state transition means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, the normal symbol operation lottery is highly probable, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended. The number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

  Step S6000: The small winning hour variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small winning manner in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit prize variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but the first big prize opening is almost generated. do not do.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, the following winning types are provided as the plurality of winning types.
(1) “4 rounds probable big hit 1”
(2) “7 rounds is usually a big hit 1”
(3) “7 rounds probable big hit 1”
(4) “7 rounds probable big hit 2”
(5) “7 rounds probable big hit 3”
(6) “10 rounds probable big hit 1”
(7) "13 rounds are usually a big hit 1"
(8) “13 rounds probable big hit 1”
(9) “13 rounds probable big hit 2”
(10) “13 rounds probable big hit 3”
(11) “16 rounds probable big hit 1”
(12) “16 rounds probable big hit 2”
(13) “16 rounds probable big hit 3”
In the present embodiment, jackpots other than these may be provided.

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “4 round probability variation jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “4 round probability variation symbol 1”, “7 round normal jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “7 round regular symbol 1”, and “7 round probability variation jackpot 1”. "Corresponds to the jackpot of" 7 round probability variation 1 "," 7 round probability variation jackpot 2 "corresponds to the jackpot of" 7 round probability variation 2 "," 7 round probability variation jackpot 3 "is" 7 round probability variation " Corresponding to the jackpot of symbol 3 "10 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "10 round probability variation symbol 1", "13 round normal jackpot 1" is the jackpot of "13 round regular symbol 1" Correspondingly, “13 round probability variation jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “13 round probability variation symbol 1”, “13 round probability variation jackpot 2” corresponds to the jackpot of “13 round probability variation symbol 2”, “13 round probability variation big hit 3” corresponds to the big hit of “13 round probability variation 3”, “16 round probability variation big hit 1” corresponds to the big hit of “16 round probability variation big 1”, “16 round probability variation big hit 2” Corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, and “16 round probability variation jackpot 3” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol 3”. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[Opening pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. Hereinafter, the opening pattern of the special winning opening corresponding to each winning symbol will be described.

[4 rounds probability variation 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “4-round probability variation symbol 1” mode in the special symbol stop display processing, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). In this case, in the first to fourth rounds, the first grand prize winning opening (upper large prize winning opening) of the first variable prize winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, 0.06 seconds open). For this reason, the big hit game of “4-round probability variation symbol 1” is a game in which almost no ball (prize ball) is given to the player.

[7 round normal design 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “7-round normal symbol 1” mode in the special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). In this case, in the first to fourth rounds, the first grand prize winning opening (upper grand prize winning slot) of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened long (for example, 29.00 seconds open). For this reason, the big hit game of “7 round normal symbol 1” is a game in which 7 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

[7 round probability variation 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “7-round probability variation symbol 1” mode during the special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). In this case, in the first to seventh rounds, the first grand prize winning opening (upper grand prize winning opening) of the first variable prize winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, 0.06 seconds open). For this reason, the big hit game of “7-round probability variation symbol 1” is a game that hardly gives out a ball (prize ball) to the player.

[7 round probability variation 2, 3]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “7 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3,” an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, in the first to seventh rounds, the first grand prize winning opening (upper grand prize winning opening) of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened long (for example, 29.00 seconds open). For this reason, the big hit game of “7 round normal symbols 2 and 3” is a game in which 7 rounds of play balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

[10-round probability variation 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “10-round probability variation symbol 1” mode during the special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). In this case, in the first round to the tenth round, the first big winning opening (upper large winning opening) of the first variable winning device 30 is opened long (for example, 29.00 seconds open). For this reason, the big hit game of “10 round probability variation 1” is a game in which 10 rounds of award (prize ball) are given to the player.

[13 round normal symbol 1, 13 round probability variation 1, 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “13 round normal symbol 1” or “13 round probability variation symbol 1, 2” in the special symbol stop display processing, the opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state Occurs (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to seventh rounds, the first grand prize winning opening (upper grand prize winning opening) of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened long (for example, 29.00 seconds open). Further, in the eighth to thirteenth rounds, the first grand prize winning port (upper major prize winning port) of the first variable prize winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, 0.06 seconds open). For this reason, the jackpot game of “13 round normal symbol 1” or “13 round probability variation symbol 1, 2” is a game in which the player is substantially provided with 7 rounds of award (prize balls).

[13 round probability variation 3]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “13 round probability variation 3”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). In this case, in the first to thirteenth rounds, the first big winning opening (upper large winning opening) of the first variable winning device 30 is opened long (for example, 29.00 seconds open). For this reason, the big hit game of “13 rounds probable variation 3” is a game in which 13 rounds of play balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

[16 rounds probabilistic pattern 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “16-round probability variation symbol 1” mode during the special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means). In this case, in the 1st to 16th rounds, the second big prize winning opening (lower big prize winning opening) of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened long (for example, 29.00 seconds open). For this reason, the big hit game of “16 rounds probable variation 1” is a game in which 16 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

[16-round probability variation 2, 3]
In the special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3,” an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, in the 1st to 16th rounds, the first grand prize opening (upper university prize opening) of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened long (for example, 29.00 seconds open). For this reason, the big hit game of “16 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3” is a game in which 16 rounds of play balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

  Then, when one of the probability variation symbols is met, the “probability variation function” is activated after the end of the jackpot game, and a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player. In addition, if one of the winning symbols is met, even if the `` time reduction function '' is inactive in the previous game, by activating the `` time reduction function '' after the big hit game, A privilege to shift to “time reduction state” is given to the player.

  Here, the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) is won in one round. Is done. Similarly, the second grand prize winning port of the second variable prize winning device 31 similarly does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) is won in one round. Closed.

  In any case, when the winning symbol corresponds to “any probability variation symbol”, the internal state shifts to the “high probability time shortening state” after the big hit game ends. On the other hand, when the winning symbol corresponds to “any normal symbol”, the internal state shifts to the “low probability time shortened state” after the big hit game ends.

[Opening time etc. of variable prize-winning equipment]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the opening time, the interval time between rounds, and the ending time of the variable winning device. Hereinafter, the setting value corresponding to each winning symbol will be described.

  Here, the opening time is the start time set as the time until the big winning opening is released at the start of the big hit game, and the interval time between rounds is set between rounds. It is a waiting time, and the ending time is an ending time set at the end of the big hit game (after the final round is finished). The interval time between rounds may or may not be set after the last round is completed.

  The jackpot game (special game) is composed of the opening time (start time) set at the start of the jackpot game, multiple round games (unit game), and the ending time (end time) set at the end of the jackpot game Has been.

[13 round normal symbol 1, 13 round probability variation 1, 2]
If the winning symbol is “13 round normal symbol 1” or “13 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”, the opening time is set to 10.000 seconds (however, it is 5.000 seconds when winning in the time shortened state) Is done. The interval time between rounds is set as 1.492 seconds (or 0.492 seconds) as the big winning opening closing effective time plus 0.008 seconds as the big winning opening closing time. The ending time is set to 4.648 seconds.

[16-round probability variation 1, 2]
When the winning symbol corresponds to “16 round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the opening time is set to 3.500 seconds. The interval time between rounds is set as a time obtained by adding 0.008 seconds as the closing time for the big winning opening to 0.292 seconds as the effective closing time for the big winning opening. The ending time is set to 9.000 seconds.

[7 round probability variation 1]
When the winning symbol corresponds to “7-round probability variable symbol 1”, the opening time is set to 8.500 seconds (however, 0.500 seconds when winning in the time reduction state). The interval time between rounds is set as a time obtained by adding 0.008 seconds as the big winning opening closing time to 0.492 seconds as the big winning opening closing effective time. The ending time is set to 3.588 seconds.

[4 rounds probability variation 1]
When the winning symbol corresponds to “4-round probability variable symbol 1”, the opening time is set to 8.500 seconds (however, 0.500 seconds when winning in the time shortening state). The interval time between rounds is set as a time obtained by adding 0.008 seconds as the big winning opening closing time to 0.492 seconds as the big winning opening closing effective time. The ending time is set to 5.268 seconds.

[7 round normal design 1]
When the winning symbol corresponds to “7 round normal symbol 1”, the opening time is set to 5.000 seconds. The interval time between rounds is set as a time obtained by adding 0.008 seconds as the closing time of the big winning opening to 1.492 seconds as the closing time of the big winning opening. The ending time is set to 9.000 seconds.

[16-round probability variation 3; 13-round probability variation 3; 10-round probability variation 1; 7-round probability variation 2; 7-round probability variation 3]
If the winning symbol is “16 round probability variation 3”, “13 round probability variation symbol 3”, “10 round probability variation symbol 1”, “7 round probability variation symbol 2” or “7 round probability variation symbol 3”, the opening time will be 3. Set to 500 seconds. The interval time between rounds is set as a time obtained by adding 0.008 seconds as the closing time of the big winning opening to 1.492 seconds as the closing time of the big winning opening. The ending time is set to 9.000 seconds.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening time, opening time, interval time between rounds, ending time, and the like differ depending on the winning symbol. These specific numerical values are merely examples, and can be changed as appropriate.

[Small hits]
Further, in the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small hit, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game execution means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). Game) to be executed. In such a small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), there is hardly any winning in the first big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so the “probability state” or “time reduction state” The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the small hit game ends. The “time reduction state” does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. At the time of return, as described above, it returns to the end address (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this processing, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value from the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and subtracts it. The later value is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. As a result, during the dynamic port output process (step S202 in FIG. 14), the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1). When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery, predetermined lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random number read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets a value (01H) corresponding to the big hit in the special symbol hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the special symbol hit flag is not set to the value corresponding to the big hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the next small hit value range in the same big hit determination process, and whether or not the read random number value is included in this range. Is determined (lottery execution means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. In other words, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to a “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets a value (02H) corresponding to the small hit in the special symbol hit flag, and then in step S2400 move on. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) corresponding to the big hit is set in the special symbol hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) corresponding to the big hit is not set in the special symbol hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the special symbol hit flag (02H) is set in the special symbol hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (02H) corresponding to the small hit is not set in the special symbol hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit or the small hit based on the individual big hit flag and the small hit flag instead of determining the big hit or the small hit based on the value of the common hit flag called the special symbol hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the variation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is in the “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and determines whether the current state is the “time reduction state”. Confirm whether or not. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 → About 3 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → 2.5 seconds) Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability non-time reduced state).
This selection table is a table (fluctuation pattern defining means) that is referred to at the time of loss in the low probability non-time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. In the “comparison value”, different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)” are provided in stages. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” and “7” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. The variation pattern number “8” corresponds to a variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern having a variation time longer than the reach) that is lost after super reach. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the “non-reach variation pattern” basically corresponds to a short variation time (for example, about 3 to 12 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach variation pattern” has a longer variation than that. This corresponds to time (for example, about 15 to 180 seconds).

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, when the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, since the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”, the main control CPU 72 determines the next comparison value “ 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “21” to “28” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and variation pattern numbers “26” to “28” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. However, since the variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “41” to “48” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “46” to “48” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[Refer to Figure 29: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, 13 types of winning symbols are prepared as the winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of the big hit. The breakdown of the 13 types is as follows.

(1) “4-round probability variation 1”
(2) “7 round normal design 1”
(3) “7 round probability variation 1”
(4) “7-round probability variation 2”
(5) “7-round probability variation 3”
(6) “10 round probability variation 1”
(7) "13 round normal design 1"
(8) “13-round probability variation 1”
(9) “13-round probability variation 2”
(10) “13 round probability variation 3”
(11) "16 round probability variation 1"
(12) “16-round probability variation 2”
(13) "16 round probability variation 3"

  Each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of “4 round probability variation 1”, “4 round probability variation 1 a”, “4 round probability variation 1 b”, “4 round probability variation 1 c”, and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) to determine the type of the winning symbol.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “35”, “3”, “22”, “24”, “ “4” and “12” correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, “13 round normal symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “13 round probability variable symbol 1”, “13 round probability variable symbol 2” corresponding to each distribution value, “7-round probability variation 1” and “4-round probability variation 1” are shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of “13 round normal symbol 1” is 35/100 (= 35%), and the proportion of “16 round probability variable symbol 1” is selected. It is 3/100 (= 3%), and the ratio at which “13-round probability variation 1” is selected is 22/100 (= 22%). In addition, the rate of selecting “13 round probability variation 2” is 24/100 (= 24%), and the rate of selecting “7 round probability variation 1” is 4/100 (= 4%). Yes, the ratio of “4-round probability variation 1” being selected is 12/100 (= 12%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. In addition, the EVENT values “01H” to “06H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and “13 round normal symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H01H”. Will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probable number of changes]
The second column from the right of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table shows the value of the probability variation number (the maximum number of times of high probability state) given after the big hit game ends.

In the case of “13 round normal symbol 1”, the probability variation number is not given (0 times is given).
On the other hand, in the case of “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “13 round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, “7 round probability variation symbol 1” or “4 round probability variation symbol 1”, the probability variation number is given 10,000 times.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (the limit number of time reduction states) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.

If it falls under “13 round normal symbol 1”, even if the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability” or “high probability”, it is in a non-time shortened state (non-short time) or a time shortened state (short time) Also, the number of time reductions is given 100 times.
On the other hand, if it falls under “16 round probability variation 1”, “13 round probability variation 1”, “13 round probability variation 2”, “7 round probability variation 1” or “4 round probability variation 1”, the special symbol win Even if the probability is “low probability” or “high probability”, and the non-time shortening state (non-time shortening) or the time shortening state (time shortening), the number of time shortening is given 10,000 times.

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the special symbol is “high probability” and there is no non-time shortened state (non-short time), but such a state may be adopted.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol big-hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) when the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each allocation value is “35”, “45”, “5”, “3”. , “3”, “8”, “1” correspond to the ratios when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “7 round normal symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2”, “16 round probability variable symbol 3”, “13 round probability variable symbol 3”, “ 10 round probability variation 1 ”,“ 7 round probability variation 2 ”, and“ 7 round probability variation 3 ”are shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting “7 round normal symbol 1” is 35/100 (= 35%), and “16 round probability variable symbol 2” is selected. The ratio is 45/100 (= 45%), and the ratio at which “16 round probability variation 3” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%). In addition, the ratio that “13 round probability variation 3” is selected is 3/100 (= 3%), and the rate that “10 round probability variation 1” is selected is 3/100 (= 3%). Yes, the ratio of “7 round probability variation 2” is 8/100 (= 8%), and the ratio of “7 round probability variation 3” is 1/100 (= 1%). is there.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here too, the stop symbol command is described as a combination of the MODE value and the EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. Represents that. Further, the EVENT values “01H” to “07H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “7 round normal symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described as “B2H01H”. Become.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probable number of changes]
In the second column from the right of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the probability variation number given after the end of the big hit game is shown.

In the case of “7 round normal symbol 1”, the probability variation number is not given (0 times is given).
On the other hand, change to “16 round probability variation 2”, “16 round probability variation 3”, “13 round probability variation 3”, “10 round probability variation 1”, “7 round probability variation 2” or “7 round probability variation 3”. If applicable, the probability variation number is given 10,000 times.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is shown.

In case of “7 round normal symbol 1”, even if the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability” or “high probability”, it is in the non-time shortened state (non-short time) or the time shortened state (short time) Also, the number of time reductions is given 100 times.
On the other hand, change to “16 round probability variation 2”, “16 round probability variation 3”, “13 round probability variation 3”, “10 round probability variation 1”, “7 round probability variation 2” or “7 round probability variation 3”. If applicable, even if the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability” or “high probability”, even if it is in a non-time shortened state (non-short time) or a time shortened state (short time), the number of time shortening is given 10,000 times Is done.

[Refer to Figure 29: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

In the present embodiment, if the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit, for example, a “reach production” is generated on the production to perform a big win. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to multiple types of “reach effects” are defined, and when a big hit is hit, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected. It will be.
Here, the reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, a super reach production, and the like. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

[Example of big hit fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduced state).
This selection table is a table that is referred to when a big win is won in a low probability non-time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. In the “comparison value”, different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)” are provided in stages. The “variation pattern number” “61” to “68” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “61” to “65” correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the super reach production is performed, and the variation pattern numbers “66” to “68” are the reach production (other than the super reach production). It corresponds to the variation pattern that is won by the reach production).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the variation pattern corresponding to the comparison value. A number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, when the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “190”, since the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”, the main control CPU 72 determines the next comparison value “ 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “81” to “88” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “101” to “108” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[Refer to Figure 29: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the value of the time shortening function activation flag (01H) as the game state flag regardless of the winning symbol type (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410. ) Is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operating means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag as the gaming state flag when the winning symbol type (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is any probability variation symbol. Processing for setting in the flag area of the RAM 76 is executed (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is only one type of “one-time small hit symbol”. However, other types such as “twice open small hit symbol” and “three open small hit symbol” may be prepared. The “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to a “high probability state” or a “time shortening state”, so “2 rounds (2 The “one-time opening small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “more than once opening”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special game management process.

[FIG. 26: Special Symbol Fluctuation Processing, Special Symbol Stop Display Processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter, and then sets the value of the timer counter according to the passage of time (clock pulse count or interrupt counter value). Decrement. Then, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the timer counter and controls the special symbol variation display until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407, and S2410 in FIG. 29). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than “0” in the previous special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 29), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the oldest one of the existing working memories corresponds to the first special symbol. That is, when the storage area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the oldest working memory among them does not correspond to the first special symbol but corresponds to the second special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 The process proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, if the oldest working memory corresponds to the first special symbol (Step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. . The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 29).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG.39 and FIG.40 is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for confirming whether or not the stop display display time has ended. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer after subtraction is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 26) and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4102. In this case, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed). The subtraction process of the stop symbol display timer may be executed in the special symbol stop display process or may be executed in the timer update process.

  Step S4102: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting an address of the big hit start ram set table. Thereby, it will be in the state which can refer to the flag per special symbol.

  Step S4104: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading a special symbol hit flag.

  Step S4106: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special symbol hit flag is set to a value (01H) corresponding to the big hit. When a value corresponding to big hit is set in the special symbol hit flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4118 (connection symbol A → A). On the other hand, when the value corresponding to the big hit is not set in the special symbol hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4108.

  Step S4108: The main control CPU 72 executes a count cut management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the following process.

  The main control CPU 72 loads the count-down counter value and checks whether the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count-down counter value is already 0, the process returns without executing any process. On the other hand, if the count cut counter value is not 0, a count cut counter value command is generated, and then the count cut counter value is decremented (subtracted by 1). When the subtraction result is 0, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number cut function is activated. In the present embodiment, when a transition is made to a “high probability time shortening state” corresponding to “any probability variation symbol”, the count-off counter regarding the high probability state and the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 10,000 times). Therefore, the probability variation function operation flag and the time shortening function operation flag are reset. In addition, when shifting to the “low probability time shortening state”, the count-down counter relating to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 100 times), so only the time shortening function operation flag is reset. is there. Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended through the special symbol stop display.

  Step S4110: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the small hit start ram set table. Thereby, it will be in the state which can refer to the flag per special symbol.

  Step S4112: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading a special symbol hit flag.

  Step S4114: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a value (02H) corresponding to the small hit is set in the special symbol hit flag. When the special symbol flag is set to a value corresponding to the small symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4118 (connection symbol A → A). On the other hand, when the value corresponding to the small hit is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4116.

  Step S4116: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol variation pre-processing as the jump destination address of the jump table. When the process of step S4116 is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process.

  Step S4118: The main control CPU 72 executes a ram set process. In the ram set process, a process is performed in which the values of various RAMs that need to be updated are stopped at a time when the special symbol is stopped at the time of big hit or small hit.

For example, the processing at the time of big hit is as follows.
The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “big hit variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “4 round probability variation symbol 1”, a value corresponding to “4 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “7 round normal symbol 1” or “7 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3”, a value corresponding to “7 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “10 round probability variation symbol 1”, a value corresponding to “10 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “13 round normal symbol 1” or “13 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3”, a value corresponding to “13 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3”, a value corresponding to “16 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command that represents a big hit. The state command representing that the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of big hit symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 29). For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “4 round probability variation symbol 1”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “4 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “7 round normal symbol 1” or “7 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “7 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “10 round probability variation symbol 1”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “10 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “13 round normal symbol 1” or “13 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “13 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

In addition, the processing at the time of small hit is as follows.
The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process for the small hitting time as the jump destination address of the jump table. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (during small hit)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4120: The main control CPU 72 executes symbol offset acquisition processing. By executing this process, the value of the symbol offset corresponding to the winning symbol can be acquired.

The symbol offset values are as follows.
The symbol offset in the case of corresponding to the first special symbol “13 round big hit (13 round normal symbol 1, 13 round probability variation symbol 1, 2)” is “0”.
The symbol offset is “1” when the first special symbol corresponds to “16 round big hit (16 round probability variation symbol 1)”.
The symbol offset in the case of corresponding to the first special symbol “7 round jackpot (7 round probability variation 1)” is “2”.
The symbol offset in the case of corresponding to the first special symbol “4 round jackpot (4 round probability variation symbol 1)” is “3”.

The symbol offset in the case of corresponding to “7 round jackpot (7 round normal symbol 1)” of the second special symbol is “4”.
The symbol offset is “5” when the second special symbol corresponds to “16 round jackpot (16 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3)”.
The symbol offset in the case of corresponding to the second special symbol “13 round jackpot (13 round probability variation 3)” is “6”.
The symbol offset in the case of corresponding to the second special symbol “10 round jackpot (10 round probability variation 1)” is “7”.
The symbol offset in the case of corresponding to “7 round jackpot (7 round probability variation symbols 1, 2)” of the second special symbol is “8”.
The symbol offset is “9” when “small hit” is met in the first special symbol lottery.

  Step S4120: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the symbol offset value.

  Step S4124: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting the address of the special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data table. By executing this process, an argument for the byte data selection process can be set.

  Step S4126: The main control CPU 72 executes byte data selection processing. By executing this processing, the “design offset value” can be converted into the “special electric accessory maximum operation count”.

  Step S4128: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for saving the value of the maximum number of times of operation of the special electric accessory obtained in the byte data selection process in the special electric accessory maximum operation frequency counter.

  Here, the “special electric accessory maximum operation number counter” can be used in the control process during the big hit. For example, during the big hit, the “big winning opening closing effective process (after the attacker closes during the big hit) For a certain period of time) ”. In this case, compare the value of the current “Special Electric Accessories Continuous Operation Count Counter (current number)” and the “Special Electric Accessories Maximum Operation Count Counter”. Branch to proceed to the next round or end the big hit. For example, if the value of the “special electric accessory maximum operation number counter” is “13” and the “special electric accessory continuous operation number counter” is “less than 13 (1 to 12)”, the “big hit big prize” The state moves to “the state before opening the mouth (big winning opening / closing operation processing at the big hit)”, and moves to the next round. On the other hand, if the value of the “special electric accessory continuous operation number counter” is “13”, the process shifts to the “big hit big winning opening end weight state (end processing at big hit)” and the big hit ends.

  Step S4130: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for restoring the value of the symbol offset.

  Step S4132: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting the address of the special electric accessory designation data table. By executing this process, an argument for the byte data selection process can be set.

  Step S4134: The main control CPU 72 executes byte data selection processing. By executing this processing, the “design offset value” can be converted into “special electric accessory designation data”.

  Step S4136: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the value of the special electric accessory designation data acquired in the byte data selection process in the special electric accessory designation flag.

Here, the “special electric accessory designation flag” can be used in count switch passage processing (processing when a game ball wins an attacker) or the like.
For example, convert the “special electric accessory designation flag” to “count switch bit data” and check if the “currently operating attacker” and “the attacker who won the game ball” are the same. If it is judged, it is counted as an illegal prize. Further, the “special electric accessory designation flag” can be used to convert the “subcommand at the time of winning an attacker (first big prize winning prize designation command data or second big prize winning prize designation command data)”. .

In addition, the “special electric accessory designation flag” can be used in the following processing.
(1) Grand prize opening control process (Big prize opening and closing operation process at big hit)
In this process, with reference to the “special electric accessory designation flag”, the prescribed number of winning prizes for the big prize opening is acquired.
(2) Launch position designation management process In this process, it is determined with reference to the “special electric accessory designation flag” whether a right-handed instruction should be given.
(3) Test signal management process In this process, the output content of the test signal related to the special electric accessory is acquired with reference to the “special electric accessory designation flag”.
(4) Grand prize opening closing time selection process (Grand prize opening closing process)
In this process, with reference to the “special electric accessory designation flag”, the winning effective time when the special winning opening is closed (the period during which the illegal winning immediately after the large winning opening is closed) is acquired.

  Step S4138: The main control CPU 72 executes an opening time setting process. By executing this process, the opening time according to the winning symbol can be set.

  Step S4140: The main control CPU 72 executes a model command setting process. By executing this process, it is possible to set a model command according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  Step S4142: The main control CPU 72 executes an opening designation command generation process.

  Step S4144: The main control CPU 72 executes a subcommand set process. With this processing, a model command, an opening designation command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 124.

  When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process.

[Byte data selection processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of byte data selection processing.

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding a selection offset (for example, symbol offset) to a selection address (for example, the top address of the special electric component maximum operation frequency data table, special electric component designation data table, etc.). To do. Thereby, a selection result address is calculated.

  Step S4202: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading selection result data indicated by the selection result address. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading data at the address indicated by the selection result address.

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a part of a program for special symbol stop display processing. It should be noted that the special symbol stop display in-process program extracts and displays only the parts necessary for the explanation.

  The first “CALLF ZUGOFFS” is a process for calling a symbol offset acquisition process.

  The next “LD B, A” is a process of saving the value of the symbol offset acquired in the symbol offset acquisition process, and loads the value of the A register into the B register.

  The next “LD HL, D_ROU_MAX” is a process of setting the top address of the special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data table, and loads the start address of the special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data table into the HL register.

  The next “RST BYTESEL” is a process for calling the byte data selection process, and calls the byte data selection process arranged in the restart area.

  The next “LDQ (LOW R_ROU_MAX), A” is a process of saving in the special electric accessory maximum operation number counter, and loads the value of the A register into the RAM corresponding to the special electric accessory maximum operation number counter.

  The next “LD A, B” is a process for restoring the value of the symbol offset, and loads the value of the A register into the B register.

  The next “LD HL, D_TDN_FLG” is a process for setting the start address of the special electric accessory designation data table, and loads the start address of the special electric accessory designation data table into the HL register.

  The next “RST BYTESEL” is a process for calling the byte data selection process, and calls the byte data selection process arranged in the restart area.

  The next “LDQ (LOW R_TDN_FLG), A” is a process of saving in the special electric accessory designation flag, and the value of the A register is saved in the RAM corresponding to the special electric accessory designation flag.

[Description of the program]
Here, a method of using the byte data selection process in the special symbol stop display process will be described. In this process, the byte data selection process is called at two locations. The purpose of use of the byte data selection processing here is to set the symbol offset value (numerical value indicating the type of jackpot) as “special electric utility maximum operation count (number of jackpot rounds)” and “special electric utility designation flag ( It is converted to a value indicating which attacker is activated).

  Before calling the byte data selection process, it is necessary to set the head address of the data table in the HL register and the symbol offset value in the A register as arguments of the byte data selection process. In this example, instead of setting a value in the A register, “symbol offset acquisition processing” is called in (1) in FIG. Although details of the symbol offset acquisition process are omitted, for example, “A register = 0 if 13 round big hit of the first special symbol 1”, “A register = 1 if big round 16 hit of the first special symbol 1”. The symbol offset value corresponding to the type of jackpot is set in the A register, such as “A register = 2 if 7 rounds jackpot of the first special symbol”.

  The head address of the table is set in the HL register at (2) in FIG. The table used here is a special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data table.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data table.
The special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data table is a table in which 1-byte data (defined in DB) is arranged.

  The first “D_ROU_MAX:” is a label indicating the head address of the special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data table, and the address coincides with “DB @BHT_ROU — 13” at the top.

  The first “DB @ BHT_ROU_13” is the 13R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data, and it corresponds to “13 round big hit (13 round normal symbol 1, 13 round probable symbol 1, 2)” in the first special symbol lottery. Data used in cases. For example, the value “13” is stored in “@BHT_ROU — 13 (13R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data)”.

  The next “DB @BHT_ROU — 16” is the 16R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data, and is data used when “16 round big hit (16 round probability variation symbol 1)” is met in the first special symbol lottery. For example, the value “16” is stored in “DB @BHT_ROU — 16 (16R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data)”.

  The next “DB @BHT_ROU — 7” is 7R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data, and is data used when “7 round jackpot (7 round probability variation 1)” is met in the first special symbol lottery. For example, the value “7” is stored in “DB @BHT_ROU — 7 (7R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data)”.

  The next “DB @BHT_ROU — 4” is 4R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data, and is data used when “4 round big hit (4 rounds probable variation 1)” is met in the first special symbol lottery. For example, the value “4” is stored in “DB @BHT_ROU — 4 (4R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data)”.

  The next “DB @BHT_ROU — 7” is 7R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data, and is data used when “7 round big hit (7 round normal symbol 1)” corresponds to the second special symbol lottery. For example, the value “7” is stored in “DB @BHT_ROU — 7 (7R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data)”.

  The next “DB @BHT_ROU — 16” is the 16R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data, which is used when the 16th round big win (16 rounds probable symbol 2, 3) is met in the second special symbol lottery. is there. For example, the value “16” is stored in “DB @BHT_ROU — 16 (16R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data)”.

  The next “DB @BHT_ROU — 13” is the 13R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data, and is data used in the case of corresponding to “13 round jackpot (13 round probability variation 3)” in the second special symbol lottery. For example, the value “13” is stored in “@BHT_ROU — 13 (13R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data)”.

  The next “DB @BHT_ROU — 10” is the 10R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data, and is data used when “10 round big hit (10 round probability variation symbol 1)” is met in the second special symbol lottery. For example, a value of “10” is stored in “@BHT_ROU — 10 (10R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data)”.

  The next "DB @ BHT_ROU_7" is the 7R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data, and is used when it corresponds to "7 round jackpot (7 round probability variation 2, 3)" in the second special symbol lottery. is there. For example, the value “7” is stored in “DB @BHT_ROU — 7 (7R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data)”.

  The next “DB @SHT_ROU_MAX” is data for the maximum number of times of the small hit special electric combination, and is data used in the case of “small hit” in the first special symbol lottery. For example, the value “2” is stored in “DB @SHT_ROU_MAX (maximum number of times of operation per special electric utility for small hits)”.

  And, by setting the top address of the special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data table as an argument of the byte data selection process, it is possible to prepare to call the byte data selection process (because the setting of the argument is completed), The byte data selection process is called at (3) in FIG.

  In the byte data selection process, as the return value, the target “special electric utility maximum number of operations (number of rounds per jackpot)” is set in the A register, and this is stored in the RAM (RWM) in (4) of FIG. save.

Subsequently, in (7) in FIG. 42, preparation for calling the byte data selection process is performed.
As for the argument, it is necessary to set the symbol offset value (big hit type) as in the previous case. In this case, the “symbol offset acquisition process” may be called again, but the symbol offset value is stored in the B register which is not used here, and is extracted and used at (5) in FIG. .
Also, the top address of the special electric accessory designation data table is set at (6) in FIG.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a special electric accessory designation data table.
The special electric accessory designation data table is a table in which 1-byte data (defined in DB) is arranged.

  The first “D_TDN_FLG:” is a label indicating the head address of the special electric accessory designation data table, and the address matches the top “DB @ TDK_AT1”.

  “DB @ TDK_AT1” at the top is upper special electric equipment designation data, and is data used when it corresponds to “13 round big hit (13 round normal symbol 1, 13 round probability variation symbol 1, 2)”. For example, “DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)” stores a value of “0” indicating an upper prize winning opening.

  The next “DB @ TDK_AT2” is lower special electric character designation data, and is data used when “16 round big hit (16 round probability variation 1)” is met in the first special symbol lottery. For example, “DB @ TDK_AT2 (lower special electric accessory designation data)” stores a value of “1” indicating the lower prize winning opening.

  The next “DB @ TDK_AT1” is the upper special electric character designation data, and is data used when “7 round big hit (7 round probability variation 1)” is met in the first special symbol lottery. For example, “DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)” stores a value of “0” indicating an upper prize winning opening.

  The next “DB @ TDK_AT1” is the upper special electric accessory designation data, the 4R special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data, and “4 round big hit (4 rounds probabilistic variable 1)” in the first special symbol lottery. This data is used when applicable. For example, “DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)” stores a value of “0” indicating an upper prize winning opening.

  The next “DB @ TDK_AT1” is the upper special electric character designation data, and is data used when “7 round big hit (7 round normal symbol 1)” corresponds to the second special symbol lottery. For example, “DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)” stores a value of “0” indicating an upper prize winning opening.

  The next “DB @ TDK_AT1” is the upper special electric character designation data, and is data used in the case of corresponding to “16 round big hit (16 round probability variation symbols 2, 3)” in the second special symbol lottery. For example, “DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)” stores a value of “0” indicating an upper prize winning opening.

  The next “DB @ TDK_AT1” is the upper special electric character designation data, and is data used in the case of corresponding to “13 round big hit (13 round probability variation 3)” in the second special symbol lottery. For example, “DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)” stores a value of “0” indicating an upper prize winning opening.

  The next “DB @ TDK_AT1” is the upper special electric character designation data, and is data used in the case of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to “10 round big hit (10 round probability variation symbol 1)”. For example, “DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)” stores a value of “0” indicating an upper prize winning opening.

  The next “DB @ TDK_AT1” is the upper special electric character designation data, and is data used in the case of corresponding to “7 round big hit (7 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3)” in the second special symbol lottery. For example, “DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)” stores a value of “0” indicating an upper prize winning opening.

  The next “DB @ TDK_AT1” is the upper special electric character designation data, and is data used in the case of “small hit” in the first special symbol lottery. For example, “DB @ TDK_AT1 (upper special electric accessory designation data)” stores a value of “0” indicating an upper prize winning opening.

Then, the byte data selection process is called at (7) in FIG.
As a return value from the byte data selection process, a value corresponding to the “special electric accessory designation flag” is set in the A register, and is stored in the RAM (RWM) at (8) in FIG.
The above is an example of the caller of the byte data selection process.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a program (first example) of byte data selection processing.

  The input register (argument) is set by the caller, the selection offset (for example, symbol offset) is set in the A register, and the selection address (for example, the maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory maximum operation count data table) is set in the HL register. A top address, a top address of the special electric accessory designation data table, etc.) are set.

The output register (return value) is set in this module and is referred to by the caller. Selection result data (the value of the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter, the value of the special electric accessory designation flag is stored in the A register. ) Is set, and the selection result address in the HL register (the value obtained by adding the symbol offset to the start address of the special electric accessory maximum operation count data table, the value obtained by adding the symbol offset to the start address of the special electric accessory specifying data table) Is set.
Protection registers (registers whose values do not change in this module) are a BC register and a DE register.

  The first “ADDWB HL, A” is a process of adding a selection offset to the selected address, and adds the lower byte of the HL register and the byte of the A register.

  The next “LD A, (HL)” is a process for loading the selection result data indicated by the selection result address, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register is loaded into the A register.

  The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

[Description of the program]
The byte data selection process is frequently used in gaming machines, and is called with the top address (HL register value) and symbol offset value (A register value) of the data table set. The data (1 byte) value is overwritten in the A register.

In this embodiment, a data table is created by using a pair register (HL) in which two 8-bit registers are paired and an instruction (ADDWB HL, A) for adding another 8-bit register (A register). Can be easily accessed.
The byte data selection processing may be arranged in the restart area and called by the RST instruction, or may be arranged in an area other than the restart area and called by the CALL instruction.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a byte data selection processing program (second example).
The differences between the first example and the second example are as follows.
(1) The F register is added to the output register, and the value of the selection result flag (zero flag) is stored in the F register.
(2) An “OR instruction” is added between the “LD instruction” and the “RET instruction”.

  “OR A” is a process of confirming the selection result data and setting the value of the selection result flag. Whether or not the specific data is 0 can be checked by the “OR A” instruction. This result is reflected in the zero flag in the flag register. The value of the zero flag can be used when branching at the caller.

  Note that the first example is effective when the caller of the byte data selection process does not perform branching based on whether the selection result data is 0 or not. Since the first example does not require the “OR A” instruction, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the second example.

[Summary of byte data selection processing]
In this way, the byte data selection process (data acquisition module) is performed by the second register having a predetermined bit number (16 bits) different from the data of the first register (A register) having a predetermined bit number (8 bits). (ADD register) is added using a single instruction to add the data in the (HL register), and an addition value is calculated. Based on the calculated addition value, predetermined data (special electric accessory maximum operation count data, This is a module for obtaining predetermined data (8-bit byte data) from a data table (special electric accessory maximum operation frequency data table, special electric accessory specifying data table) in which special electric accessory specifying data is stored. . The main control device 70 includes byte data selection processing (data acquisition module).

  The byte data selection process is called with the symbol offset value stored in the A register (first register) as the argument and the head address of the data table stored in the HL register (second register). .

  Further, in the byte data selection processing, as a return value, selection result data (predetermined data) is set in the A register, and the selection result address of the data table (address of the area where the predetermined data is stored) is set in the HL register. Set.

  The A register (first register) is a single register using one storage circuit capable of storing 8-bit data. The HL register (second register) is a pair register using two storage circuits capable of storing 8-bit data.

  The ADDWB instruction (addition instruction) is an instruction for adding all 8 bits of the A register (first register) and the lower 8 bits of the HL register (second register).

  The byte data selection process basically converts data belonging to a predetermined category received as an argument into data belonging to another category different from the predetermined category.

  More specifically, in the byte data selection process, the data indicating the type of winning received as an argument (data related to the winning symbol), the data relating to the number of times of operation of the electric accessory (special electric accessory maximum operating number data), or , It is converted into at least one of data (upper or lower special electric accessory designation data) that designates the electric accessory to be operated.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a byte data selection processing program (comparative example).
The byte data selection process of the comparative example is a code that prioritizes not creating a free area.

The first “ADD A, L” is a process of adding the selected offset and the lower byte of the selected address.
The next “LD L, A” is a process of setting the operation result value in the lower byte of the selection result address.
The next “JR NC, BYTESEL — 10” is a process that branches to “BYTESEL — 10 (label)” if there is no carry.
The next “INC H” is a process of adding 1 to the upper byte of the selected address.
The next “BYTESEL — 10:” is a branch destination label.
The next “LD A, (HL)” is a process of loading the selection result data indicated by the selection result address.
The next “OR A” is a process of confirming the selection result data and setting the selection result flag value.
The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

  In the comparative example program, when performing addition processing between registers, there was only an idea that the digits had to be aligned, so the program capacity was increased, but in the first and second examples of this embodiment, the digit was changed. Addition processing is performed without aligning digits using a new idea of using an ADDWB instruction that executes addition processing without alignment.

  In the program of the first example, “ADDWB HL, A” is “1 byte”, “LD A, (HL)” is “1 byte”, “RET” is “1 byte”, The program capacity is “3 bytes”.

  In the program of the second example, “ADDWB HL, A” is “1 byte”, “LD A, (HL)” is “1 byte”, “OR A” is “1 byte”, “ “RET” is “1 byte”, and the total program capacity is “4 bytes”.

  On the other hand, in the program of the comparative example, “ADD A, L” is “1 byte”, “LD L, A” is “1 byte”, “JR NC, BYTESEL — 10” is “2 bytes”, “INC H” is “1 byte”, “LD A, (HL)” is “1 byte”, “OR A” is “1 byte”, and “RET” is “1 byte”. The total program capacity is “8 bytes”.

When comparing the first example, the second example, and the comparative example, the program capacity of the module is reduced by “5 bytes in the first example and 4 bytes in the second example”.
Further, when the first example, the second example, and the comparative example are compared, the processing time of the module can be reduced by 32.4 to 37.5%.
As a result, the operation of the gaming machine can be made more stable than before.

[Opening time setting process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the opening time setting process.

  Step S4210: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for setting the address of the opening time data 1 table. By executing this process, an argument for the word data selection process can be set (normal time).

  Step S4212: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading a time selection flag. The time selection flag is stored in the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 sets “1” when it is in the time reduction state, and sets “0” when it is in the non-time reduction state.

  Step S4214: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the time selection flag is “0”. When the time selection flag is “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4218. On the other hand, when the time selection flag is not “0”, that is, when the time selection flag is “1” (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4216.

  Step S4216: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting the address of the opening time data 2 table. By executing this process, it is possible to set an argument for the word data selection process (time saving).

  Step S4218: The main control CPU 72 executes symbol offset acquisition processing. By executing this process, the value of the symbol offset corresponding to the winning symbol can be acquired. The content of the process is the same as the content described above.

  Step S4220: The main control CPU 72 executes a word data selection process. By executing this process, the “design offset value” can be converted into the “opening time”.

  Step S4222: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for saving the value of the opening time acquired in the word data selection processing in a special game timer (big hit start time timer). The saved special game timer is counted down with the passage of time as an opening time, and used as a variable for managing the opening time.

[Word data selection processing]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of word data selection processing.

  Step S4230: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the selected offset (for example, symbol offset) twice to the selected address (for example, the top address of the opening time data 1 table, the opening time data 2 table, etc.). Thereby, a selection result address is calculated.

  Step S4322: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading selection result data indicated by the selection result address. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading data at the address indicated by the selection result address.

  Step S4234: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the lower byte value of the selection result data in the A register.

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a program for the opening time setting process.

  The first “LD HL, D_STA_TMR1” is a process for setting the address of the opening time data 1 table, and the head address of the opening time data 1 table is loaded into the HL register.

  The next “LDQ A, (LOW R_TMR_FLG)” is a process of loading the time selection flag, and the value of the time selection flag is loaded into the A register.

  The next “JR TZ, TSTATMR — 10” is a process that branches to “TSTATMR — 10: (label)” if the time selection flag is 0.

  The next “LD HL, D_STA_TMR2” is a process for setting the address of the opening time data 2 table, and loads the head address of the opening time data 2 table into the HL register.

  The next “CALLF ZUGOFFS” is a process of calling a symbol offset acquisition process.

  The next “RST WOLDSEL” is a process for calling the word data selection process, and calls the word data selection process arranged in the restart area.

  The next “LDQ (LOW R_TOK_TMR), HL” is a process for saving in the special game timer, and a process for loading the value of the HL register into the special game timer.

  The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

[Description of the program]
Here, a method of using the word data selection process in the opening time setting process will be described. In this process, the opening time (waiting time for production) is determined at the start of the big hit.

First, the head address of the opening time data 1 table or the opening time data 2 table is set in the HL register. Which table head address is set varies depending on whether the value of the time selection flag (R_TMR_FLG) is 0 or not.
The time selection flag is “0” in the non-time shortening state, and is “1” in the time shortening state. Here, it is assumed that the opening time data 1 table is set because it is in a non-time shortening state.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an opening time data 1 table.
In the opening time data 1 table, 2-byte timer values are arranged (defined by DW).

  The first “D_STA_TMR1:” is a label indicating the head address of the opening time data 1 table, and the address coincides with “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST1” at the top.

  The first “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST1” is opening time data, and is used when the first special symbol lottery corresponds to “13 round big hit (13 round normal symbol 1, 13 round probability variation symbol 1, 2)”. is there. For example, the value “10.000” is stored in “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST1”.

  The next “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3” is opening time data, and is data used when “16 round big hit (16 round probability variation symbol 1)” is met in the first special symbol lottery. For example, the value “3.500” is stored in “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3”.

  The next “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST7” is opening time data, and is data used when the first special symbol lottery corresponds to “7 round big hit (7 round probability variation 1)”. For example, “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST7” stores a value of “8.500”.

  The next "DW @ TMR_TDN_ST7" is opening time data, and is data used when the first special symbol lottery corresponds to "4 round big hit (4 round probability variation symbol 1)". For example, “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST7” stores a value of “8.500”.

  The next “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST2” is opening time data, and is data used when “7 round big hit (7 round normal symbol 1)” in the second special symbol lottery. For example, a value of “5.000” is stored in “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST2”.

  The next “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3” is opening time data, and is data used in the case of corresponding to “16 round big hit (16 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3)” in the second special symbol lottery. For example, the value “3.500” is stored in “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3”.

  The next “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3” is opening time data, and is data used when “13 round big hit (13 round probability variation 3)” is met in the second special symbol lottery. For example, the value “3.500” is stored in “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3”.

  The next “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3” is opening time data, and is data used when “10 round big hit (10 round probability variation 1)” is met in the second special symbol lottery. For example, the value “3.500” is stored in “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3”.

  The next “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3” is opening time data, and is data used when “7 round big hit (7 round probability variation symbols 2 and 3)” is met in the second special symbol lottery. For example, the value “3.500” is stored in “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST3”.

  The next “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST5” is opening time data, and is data used in the case of “small hit” in the first special symbol lottery. For example, the value “7.00” is stored in “DW @ TMR_TDN_ST5”.

  In addition, the opening time data 2 table is a table in which the opening time is set for each winning symbol at the time of shortening, and the value of the opening time data is different from the opening time data 1 table, but the table configuration is the opening time data 1 The contents are omitted because they are the same as the table.

  Then, by setting the head address of the opening time data 1 table as an argument of the word data selection process, the first preparation for calling the word data selection process is completed (one of the two arguments). ) Completes the argument setting).

  Subsequently, the symbol offset acquisition process is called at (1) in FIG. Although details of the symbol offset acquisition process are omitted, for example, “A register = 0 if 13 round big hit of the first special symbol 1”, “A register = 1 if big round 16 hit of the first special symbol 1”. The symbol offset value corresponding to the type of jackpot is set in the A register, such as “A register = 2 if 7 rounds jackpot of the first special symbol”. Thereby, the second preparation for calling the word data selection process is completed (the setting of the other argument of the two arguments is completed).

Then, the word data selection process is called at (2) in FIG.
As a result, the opening time (the production waiting time at the start of the big hit) is set in the HL register. This is directly stored in the RAM (RWM).
The above is an example of the caller of the word data selection process.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a program (embodiment) for byte data selection processing.

  The input register (argument) is set by the caller, a selection offset (for example, symbol offset) is set in the A register, and a selection address (for example, the start address or opening of the opening time data 1 table) is set in the HL register. First address of time data 2 table) is set.

The output register (return value) is set by this module and is referred to by the caller. The selection result data lower byte value (lower 8 bytes of data of the opening time) is set in the A register, and the HL register is set. Selection result data (16-bit data of opening time) is set.
Protection registers (registers whose values do not change in this module) are a BC register and a DE register.

  The first “ADDWB HL, A” and the next “ADDWB HL, A” are processes for adding the selected offset to the selected address twice, and the value of the A register is added to the lower byte of the HL register. Times, the value of the A register is added to the lower byte of the HL register.

For example, it is assumed that the top address of the opening time data 1 table is “1000 address”.
When the value of the A register (design offset value) is “0”, the value of the HL register is “1000 (= 1000 + 0 + 0)”.
When the value of the A register (design offset value) is “1”, the value of the HL register is “1002 (= 1000 + 1 + 1)”.
The reason why the value of the A register is added twice in this manner is that the target data to be acquired is composed of 2 bytes.

  The next “LD HL, (HL)” is a process of loading the selection result data, and loads the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register into the HL register.

  The next “LD A, L” is a process for setting the lower byte value of the selection result data, and loads the data in the L register into the A register.

  The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

[Description of the program]
The word data selection process is called with the start address (HL register value) and symbol offset value (A register value) of the data table set, and the value of specific data (2 bytes) in the table is stored in the HL register. Overwrite to.

  In the word data selection process, the lower byte of 2-byte data is overwritten in the A register. This process may not be performed as necessary. The reason for executing this process is to save the trouble of dividing by the caller (division process) when the 2-byte data is a pair of one-byte data and another one-byte data. is there.

  In word data selection processing, an instruction (LD HL, (HL) instruction) for loading data at an address indicated by a pair register (HL register) in which two 8-bit registers are paired into the same pair register (HL register) 2 bytes of data (word data) are extracted in a short processing time.

[Summary of word data selection process]
In this way, the word data selection process (specified data acquisition module) converts the specified data (opening time data) stored in the address indicated by the specified register (HL register) having the specified number of bits (16 bits) into the specified register ( A module that acquires specified data (opening time data) from a data table (opening time data 1 table) in which specified data is stored using a load instruction (LD HL, (HL) instruction) to be loaded into the HL register) is there. The main controller 70 includes a word data selection process (specified data acquisition module).

  In addition, the word data selection process includes an add instruction (ADDWB instruction) that adds the address indicated by the specified register (HL register) to the data of the predetermined register (A register) and the data of the specified register (HL register) with one instruction. ) To calculate.

  Further, in the word data selection process, the address indicated by the regulation register (HL register) is calculated by continuously executing an addition instruction (ADDWB instruction) a plurality of times.

  Furthermore, in the word data selection process, the symbol offset value (difference value) is set in the predetermined register (A register) as an argument, and the top address of the data table is set in the specified register (HL register). Is called.

  In addition, in the word data selection process, as a return value, data of a predetermined number of lower bits of the prescribed data (lower 8 bits of the selection result data) is set in the prescribed register (A register), and the prescribed register (HL register) is set. Set prescribed data (16 bits of selection result data).

  The word data selection process basically converts data belonging to a predetermined category received as an argument into data belonging to another category different from the predetermined category.

  More specifically, the word data selection process converts data indicating the type of winning received as an argument (data related to the winning symbol) into data related to the operation of the special electric accessory (data related to the opening time).

  The word data selection processing may be arranged in the restart area and called by the RST instruction, or may be arranged in an area other than the restart area and called by the CALL instruction.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a word data selection processing program (comparative example).
The word data selection process of the comparative example is a program arranged in the restart area, but does not fit in 8 bytes, and is a program divided into a first half part and a second half part.

The first “PUSH DE” is a process of saving the DE register.
The next “LDE, A” is a process for setting the selected offset.
The next “LD D, 0” is a process of loading 0 into the D register.
The next “ADD HL, DE” and the next “ADD HL, DE” are processes for adding the selection offset twice to the selection address and calculating the selection result data storage address.
The next “JR WORDSEL — 10” is a process of jumping to another location (WORDSEL — 10: (label)) to secure a restart area. This completes the process for the first half. The following is the latter half of the processing.

The next “LD A, (HL)” is a process of loading the selection result data lower byte value.
The next “INC HL” is a process of setting the selection result data upper byte storage address.
The next “LD H, (HL)” is a process of setting selection result data.
The next “LD L, A” is a process of loading the data of the A register into the L register.
The next “POP DE” is a process for restoring the value of the DE register.
The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

In the comparative example program, since there was no idea of storing the data at the address indicated by the HL register in the HL register, the program capacity was increased.
On the other hand, in the program example of this embodiment, word data is acquired using a new idea of using “LD HL, (HL) instruction” that stores data at the address indicated by the HL register in the HL register, and the program capacity Have reduced.

  In the program of the embodiment, “ADDWB HL, A” is “1 byte”, “ADDWB HL, A” is “1 byte”, “LD HL, (HL)” is “2 bytes”, “LD A, L” is “1 byte”, “RET” is “1 byte”, and the total program capacity is “6 bytes”.

  On the other hand, in the program of the comparative example, “PUSH DE” is “1 byte”, “LDE, A” is “1 byte”, “LD D, 0” is “2 bytes”, and “ADD” “HL, DE” is “1 byte”, “ADD HL, DE” is “1 byte”, “JR WORDSEL — 10” is “2 bytes”, and “LD A, (HL)” is “1 byte”. "INC HL" is "1 byte", "LD H, (HL)" is "1 byte", "LD L, A" is "1 byte", and "POP DE" Is “1 byte”, “RET” is “1 byte”, and the total program capacity is “14 bytes”.

When the embodiment and the comparative example are compared, the program capacity of the module is reduced by “8 bytes”.
Further, when the embodiment and the comparative example are compared, the processing time of the module can be reduced by 32.4 to 37.5%.

As described above, in the program of the comparative example, in addition to the 8 bytes of the RST area, the general area uses 6 bytes. However, the program of the embodiment uses only 8 bytes of the RST area. Therefore, a capacity reduction of 6 bytes can be realized.
Further, regarding the processing time, since the program of the comparative example has 72 states and the program of the embodiment has 36 states, an improvement of 50% can be realized.
As a result, the operation of the gaming machine can be made more stable than before.

[Dynamic port output processing]
Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the dynamic port output process (step S202 in FIG. 14) executed in the interrupt management process. The dynamic port output processing includes special symbol display setting processing (step S1200), normal symbol display setting processing (step S1210), state display setting processing (step S1220), operation memory display setting processing (step S1230), and continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates and outputs drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a. It is processing to do.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the short time state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the special symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output.

  Further, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a1 to 38a5 in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any one of the big hit type display lamps 38a1 to 38a5 based on the value of the continuous operation number status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a1 to 38a5 corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number status specifies “4 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a1 representing “4 rounds (4R)”. If the value of the continuous operation count status designates “7 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a2 representing “7 rounds (7R)”. If the value of the continuous operation number status specifies “10 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a3 representing “10 rounds (10R)”. If the value of the continuous operation count status designates “13 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a4 representing “13 rounds (13R)”. If the value of the continuous operation number status specifies “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a5 representing “16 rounds (16R)”.

[Variable winning device management process for big hits]
Next, details of the big win variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the big win variable winning device management process. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes a jackpot game process selection process (step S5100), a jackpot bonus game opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a bonus game start process (step S5250), and a jackpot bonus game opening / closing operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5300), jackpot closing prize closing processing (step S5400), and jackpot end processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the big win variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 starts the big hit time start process (step S5250) as the next jump destination. Select. Further, if the big hit time start process (step S5250) has been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit time big prize opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit time big prize opening / closing operation. If the processing has been completed, the big winning big prize closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process and the big hit big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end process ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process for big hits]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for the big winning prize opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed and the time of each opening at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Number of wins) and ending time. The winning pattern opening pattern for each winning symbol, the interval time between rounds, and the ending time are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during jackpot shown in FIG. Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during the opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). But not very difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol selected in the big jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 29). Specifically, if “4-round probability variation 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to four. If “7 round normal symbol 1” and “7 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3” are selected as the winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to seven. Furthermore, if “10 round probability variation 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to ten. Furthermore, if “13 round normal symbol 1” and “13 round probability variation symbols 1 to 3” are selected as the winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 13 times. If “16 round probability variation 1 to 3” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in, for example, a buffer area of the RAM 76 using a corresponding value on the program.

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit release timer based on the operation pattern of the big prize opening release pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit opening timer, the opening time is sufficient to easily enter the big prize opening during one opening. Time (for example, a time when 10 or more game balls are fired by the firing control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if the value of the big-hit opening timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the opening time hardly occurs (it becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to enter the big winning opening during one opening. ) A short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the firing control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the operation pattern of the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit time start process, and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process (FIG. 55).

[Start processing at big hit]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit start process. This process is for controlling the opening time (start time) at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit time start time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts down the value of the special game timer (big hit start time timer) as time elapses (each time this module is called). The special game timer (big hit start time timer) may be updated by timer update processing.

  Step S5262: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit start time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit time start time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time start time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 55).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit time start time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time start time has passed (Yes), and executes the process of step S5264.

  Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning prize opening / closing operation process.

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management processing (FIG. 55).

[Big prize opening and closing operation processing at big hit]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning prize opening / closing operation process for the big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big prize winning interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the big prize opening interval timer is counting down by checking whether or not the big prize opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. it can.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the big prize winning interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the big prize opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 operates, and it shifts from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous big hit big prize opening release pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 56) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning port or the second large winning port being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round of big hit). If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. Then, when the big win variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the procedure from step S5301 to step S5310. To do.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the special winning opening opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. .

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 shifts from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the big winning opening interval timer set in the big winning big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 56).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening interval time has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the big prize opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the big prize opening interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control is performed. The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 55). Then, when the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation processing is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the big prize winning interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, “the number of times set in the current round” is determined, for example, “the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times within one round of big hit” This is to cope with the open pattern. When such an open pattern is not employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Accordingly, in each round during the big hit game, since the counter value reaches the set number of times by one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

  On the other hand, when a pattern that repeats a plurality of opening / closing operations within one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the jackpot big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is repeatedly executed. To do. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning big prize opening closing process, and returns to the big win variable winning device management process. Then, when the big win time variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Closing the big prize at the big hit]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a big winning prize closing process. This big winning time big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5401a: The main control CPU 72 executes a round interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value of the interval time between rounds in the interval timer between rounds, and then counts down the timer with the passage of time (every time this module is called).

  Step S5401b: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time between rounds has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the interval timer between rounds is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the interval time between rounds has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 55).

  Thereafter, when the value of the interval timer between rounds becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the interval time between rounds has elapsed (Yes), and executes the process of step S5402.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the big hit variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the big hit game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 55), the big jump time big winning opening / closing operation process is the next jump destination. Execute. Then, after the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process is executed, the big hit special prize opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit special prize opening closing process again, and repeatedly executes steps S5402 to S5408. To do. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (9 times or 16 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at jackpot]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit end processing. This big-hit end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 55).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit time end timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the special symbol hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 29) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76, for example, and becomes a count-down counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since there is no substantial upper limit for the high probability state, there is almost no occurrence in the case of returning to the low probability state without obtaining a winning result in the high probability state (so-called loop type probability changing machine). . If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 29) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 10,000 times). Here, which number of time reductions is set depends on the value of the probability variation function activation flag. That is, the main control CPU 72 sets 10000 times as the number of time reductions when the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (high probability time shortening state transition means, advantageous game state transition means), and the value of the probability variation function operation flag. If is not set, 100 is set as the number of time savings (low probability time shortening state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). The set value of the short time count is stored in the short time count area of the RAM 76. The number of time reductions set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normally in progress” is generated as the gaming state when the special symbol per flag is reset or the main character ends. In addition, if the probability variation function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “time reduction in progress”. Is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit time big winning opening releasing pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 26) in the special game management process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the small winning hour variable winning device management process. The small winning time prize winning device management process includes a small winning game process selection process (step S6100), a small winning time big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hitting big prize opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). The sub-group includes a subroutine group of a small winning big prize opening closing process (step S6400) and a small winning end process (step S6500).

  Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small winning hour variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening / closing operation processing has been completed, the small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hitting big winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hitting end process (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big winning opening opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big prize opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening of the big prize opening to, for example, two based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit release timer, and during such an open time, there is almost no winning in the big prize opening during one opening (it is difficult ) For a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the launching device unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the first variable prize-winning apparatus 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening big opening / closing operation processing and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 61). The main control CPU 72 then executes a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening and closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operate | moves and it transfers to an open state from a closed state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the opening timer set in the previous small hitting big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 62) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6308. Execute.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit). If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning hour variable winning device management process (FIG. 61). Then, when the bonus game variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the bonus game opening / closing operation process at the bonus game at this stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure from step S6301 to step S6310. Run repeatedly.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step opening before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 returns from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 62).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 can change the small hit time. Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 61). Then, when the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process. Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a small hitting big prize opening closing process.

[Closed big prize opening closing process]
FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big prize opening closing process. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 62). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit prize opening / closing operation process.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 61).

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 61) is the next jump destination small winning big prize opening / closing operation process. Execute. After executing the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small winning big prize opening closing process until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of opening times (two times). The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6418.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the release number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the small hit end processing.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 61). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the small hit end processing. This small hitting end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the small hitting. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 61).

  Thereafter, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the special symbol hit flag (00H), deletes “meeting small hit” from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game. It should be noted that in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 26) in the special game management process as the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process.

[Normal game management processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal game management process.

  Step S7000: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the normal game management phase. In this process, the normal game management phase is set in the A register. The values of the normal game management phase are as follows.

[Normal game management phase]
The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the normal game management phase (in the brackets) according to the game progress statuses (1) to (7) corresponding to the normal symbols as follows, for example.
(1) Normal symbol variation waiting state: “00H”
(2) Normal symbol fluctuation display state: “01H”
(3) Normal symbol stop symbol display state: “02H”
(4) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric equipment) Before opening the winning opening: “03H”
(5) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) winning opening control state: “04H”
(6) Variable start winning device (ordinary electric accessory) winning end finish weight state: “05H”

  The “normal symbol variation waiting state” is a state in which the variation of the normal symbol is started when there is a hold. The “normal symbol fluctuation display state” is a state in which the normal symbol is fluctuating. The “normal symbol stop symbol display state” is a state in which the variation of the normal symbol is finished and the lottery result is being displayed. The “previous state before releasing the normal electric bonus item” is a state in which a normal symbol lottery is won and the operation of the normal electric bonus (release of the electric chew) is awaited. The “normal electric accessory winning opening release control state” is a state in which the normal electric accessory is operating. The “normal electric accessory winning port end weight state” is a state in which the operation of the ordinary electric accessory has ended.

  Step S7002: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the address of the normal game jump table. In this process, the head address of the normal game jump table is set in the HL register. In the normal game jump table, the top addresses of six modules related to the normal symbol are described in order.

  Step S7004: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for executing word data selection processing. In this process, based on the HL register (ordinary game jump table address) and A register (ordinary game management phase value) set in advance, the start address of the module to be called is set in the HL register.

  Step S7006: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading a normal game timer. In this process, a normal game timer (a timer in which time for staying in the current state is set) is set in the DE register.

  Step S7008: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calling the target module related to the normal game. In this process, a process for calling one of the set six types of modules is executed. The target module is a module according to the value of the normal game management phase. For example, if the value of the normal game management phase is “00H”, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of calling the normal symbol variation pre-processing. If the value of the normal game management phase is “01H”, a process of calling the normal symbol change process is executed. If the value of the normal game management phase is “02H”, a process of calling the normal symbol stop display process is executed. Run.

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management processing (FIG. 14).

[Normal pattern change pre-processing]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the normal symbol variation pre-processing.

  Step S7010: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for confirming whether or not the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is zero.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal game management process (FIG. 66). On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S7012.

  Step S7012: The main control CPU 72 executes normal symbol storage area shift processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads a random number for lottery (determined random number per ordinary symbol) stored in a random number storage area (ordinary random number stored per ordinary symbol 1) of the RAM 76, and, for example, stores the determined random number per ordinary symbol 0 Save it in the relevant area. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers from the first section (ordinary random number stored per ordinary symbol 1) and the remaining random numbers (determined random numbers stored per ordinary symbol 2 to 4). ) Are moved (shifted) one by one to the previous section (normal random numbers stored per symbol 1 to 3). The random numbers saved in the random number determined per ordinary symbol memory 0 are used for the success / failure lottery in the subsequent per symbol determination process.

  Step S7014: The main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol hit determination process. Details of the process will be described later.

  Step S7016: The main control CPU 72 executes a normal symbol stop symbol number determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for determining a normal symbol stop symbol number different from the above. The main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of loss by the normal symbol display device 33 in the case of loss, and determines the stop symbol number at the time of hit by the normal symbol display device 33 in the case of winning.

  Step S7018: The main control CPU 72 executes normal symbol variation time setting processing. The variation time is determined in consideration of the gaming state and the result of the normal symbol lottery. Note that the variation time may be a variation time that is different from that at the time of winning or a common variation time.

  Step S7020: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting the address of the normal symbol variation start ram set table.

Step S7022: The main control CPU 72 executes a ram set process.
By executing the processing of step S7020 and step S7022, the RAM setting and command generation / transmission processing required at the start of normal symbol variation are executed.

  When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal game management process (FIG. 66).

[Normal symbol per process]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the normal symbol hit determination process.

  Step S7020: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading a special symbol state flag. The value of the special symbol state flag is the value of the state offset. The special symbol state flag is “0” when the winning probability of the normal symbol is low (in the non-time shortening state), and the winning symbol probability of the normal symbol is high (in the time shortening state). "1" in some cases). The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the special symbol state flag when the gaming state is switched.

  Step S7022: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the head address of the normal symbol per-selection selection table.

  Step S7024: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for executing double byte selection processing.

  Step S7026: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the determined random number memory 0 per normal symbol (loading into the D register).

  Step S7028: The main control CPU 72 executes word data determination processing. By this process, it is determined whether the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit or not.

  Although the specific processing contents of the word data determination processing are omitted, in brief description, first, the contents (lower limit value) of the data table indicated by the address stored in the HL register and the D register are stored. A process for comparing the random number value is executed, and 1 is added to the value of the HL register, and a process for comparing the upper limit value and the random number value is executed. If it is within the winning range, “C register = 1”, and if not within the winning range, “C register = 0”. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can determine whether or not the normal symbol lottery is successful based on the value of the “C register”.

  Step S7030: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting normal symbol hit information [01H]. By this process, the value at the time of winning is temporarily set.

  Step S7032: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining whether or not the random number stored in the normal symbol determined random number storage 0 is within the winning range. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for confirming whether or not “C register = 1”.

  As a result, when it is determined that the random number stored in the determined random number memory 0 for normal symbols is within the winning range, that is, when it is confirmed that “C register = 1” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 Executes step S7036. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the random number stored in the random number stored in the normal symbol determined 0 is within the winning range, that is, when it is confirmed that “C register = 0” (No), the main control The CPU 72 executes step S7034.

  Step S7034: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting the normal symbol deviation information [00H]. This process cancels the situation in which the value at the time of winning is temporarily set.

  Step S7036: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the normal symbol per-unit information [01H] or the normal symbol offset information [00H] in the normal symbol per-flag. The value of the normal symbol per flag is used when determining whether or not the player has won in the subsequent normal game management process.

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the normal symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 67).

[Double byte selection processing]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of double-byte selection processing.

  Step S7030: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the selection offset to the selection address.

  Step S7032: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading offset data indicated by the addition result address.

  Step S7034: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding offset data to the addition result address.

  When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

[Normal symbol per process]
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a program for a normal symbol hit determination process.
In this program, the process of selecting the normal symbol per table determination table is executed by the first three lines of instructions, and the normal symbol per group determination process is executed by the instructions of the fourth and subsequent lines.

  The first “LDQ A, (LOW R_ZTN_FLG)” is a process of loading a special symbol state flag (state offset), and loads the value of the special symbol state flag (R_ZTN_FLG) into the A register.

  The next “LD HL, D_JDG_FHT” is a process for setting the address of the normal symbol per-selection selection table, and loads the head address of the normal symbol per-unit determination selection table into the HL register.

  The next “RST DBLBYTE” is a process for calling a double-byte selection process, and calls a double-byte selection process arranged in the restart area.

  The next “LDQ DE, (LOW R_MFZ_ATA — 0)” is a process of loading a random number stored in the determined random number memory 0 per ordinary symbol, and the determined random number per ordinary symbol stored in the determined random number memory 0 per ordinary symbol Is loaded into the DE register.

  The next “CALLF WORDJDG” is a process for calling a word data determination process.

  The next “LD A, @FZ__HIT” is a process of setting information [01H] per normal symbol, and loads the value (01H) of “@FZ__HIT” into the A register.

  The next “JRC, FATAJDG — 10” is a process of branching to “FATAJDG — 10: (label)” if the random number stored in the random number determined random number storage 0 is within the winning range.

  The next “XOR A” is processing for setting the normal symbol deviation information [00H], and “00H” is set in the A register. Here, when the A register is set to 0, the XOR instruction is used instead of the LD instruction because the XOR instruction can reduce the program capacity (XOR instruction = 1 byte, LD instruction = 2 bytes).

  The next “LDQ (LOW R_FZ__HIT), A” is a process for saving the flag per ordinary symbol, and loads the value of the A register into the flag per ordinary symbol (R_FZ__HIT).

  The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

[Description of the program]
Here, a method of using the double byte selection process in the normal symbol hit determination process will be described. In this process, when the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is low (non-time shortened state) and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high (time shortening state), the winning range is different. Whether or not the symbol lottery is successful is determined.

  The winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is low in the non-time shortened state (which may be included in big hits or in the latent state) in the normal state, and high in the time shortened state (during probability fluctuation and short time). Become.

In (1) in FIG. 70, a special symbol selection flag is read and set as an offset value (state offset).
The special symbol state flag represents a short time state. When the value of the special symbol state flag is “0”, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is low, and the value of the special symbol state flag is “1”. In this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high.

  In (2) of FIG. 70, the top address of the data table (ordinary symbol determination selection table) in which the offsets to the lottery data table for each state are collected is set.

  In (3) of FIG. 70, the double-byte selection process is called to obtain the start address of the target table (ordinary symbol low probability hourly determination table or normal symbol high probability hourly determination table).

  In the program thereafter, the normal symbol lottery determination is executed based on the head address of the target table.

  Here, in this embodiment, two tables corresponding to the gaming state are prepared as tables used for the normal symbol hit determination process. The two tables are as follows.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a normal symbol low probability hourly determination table and a normal symbol high probability hourly determination table.

  In the normal symbol low-probability time determination table, two 2-byte data are arranged side by side (defined by DW).

  The first “D_JDG_FHT_L:” is a label indicating a normal symbol low-probability time-per-hour determination table, and the address coincides with “DW @FHT_BTM” at the top.

  “DW @FHT_BTM” at the head is a lower limit value per normal symbol, and indicates a lower limit value of winning in a low probability (non-time shortened state). For example, the value “0100H (1)” is stored in “DW @FHT_BTM”. “01” is a lower value and “00” is an upper value.

The next “DW @FHT_TOP_L” is an upper limit value per normal symbol, and indicates an upper limit value for winning at a low probability (non-time shortened state). For example, the value “0100H (1)” is stored in “DW @FHT_TOP_L”.
Since the lower limit value and the upper limit value are the same value, it is won only when the random number is 1.

  In the normal symbol high probability per hour determination table, two 2-byte data are arranged side by side (defined by DW).

  The first “D_JDG_FHT_H:” is a label indicating a normal symbol high probability hourly determination table, and the address is the same as “DW @FHT_BTM” at the top.

  “DW @FHT_BTM” at the head is a lower limit value for each normal symbol, and indicates a lower limit value for winning at a high probability (time shortened state). For example, the value “0100H (1)” is stored in “DW @FHT_BTM”. This value is common to the low probability case.

  The next “DW @FHT_TOP_H” is an upper limit value per normal symbol, and indicates an upper limit value for winning at a high probability (time shortening state). For example, the value of “FFFFH (65535)” is stored in “DW @FHT_TOP_H”.

  In addition to these two tables, a table is prepared in which offsets to the top addresses of the two tables are collected. The table in which the offsets are collected is arranged on the program immediately before the above-described two tables (the normal symbol low probability time determination table and the normal symbol high probability time determination table).

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a normal symbol hit determination selection table.

  In the normal symbol determination determination table, two 1-byte data are arranged side by side (defined by DB).

  “DB D_JDG_FHT_L− $” at the head is an offset to the normal symbol low probability time determination table, and is data used when the normal symbol lottery is executed in a non-time shortened state. For example, the value “02” is stored in “DB D_JDG_FHT_L− $ (offset to the normal symbol low probability per hour determination table)”.

  The next “DB D_JDG_FHT_H- $” is an offset to the normal symbol high probability hourly determination table, and is data used when the normal symbol lottery is executed in a time shortened state. For example, the value “05” is stored in “DB D_JDG_FHT_H- $”.

  Note that “D_JDG_FHT_L” indicates the top address of the normal symbol low probability per hour determination table, “D_JDG_FHT_H” indicates the top address of the normal symbol high probability per time determination table, and “$” indicates “$”. "Indicates the address (current address) of the point where"

  Such a method (method using the table configuration as described above) cannot be used for “when individual data is large, or when the offset value is not enough with 255 (hexadecimal FF)”, but is used in gaming machines. Since many program data tables are small, they can be used in many cases.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a program (embodiment) for double-byte selection processing.

  The input register (argument) is set by the caller, the selection offset (for example, state offset) is set in the A register, and the selection address (for example, the head address of the normal symbol determination selection table) is set in the HL register. Is set.

  The output register (return value) is set by this module and is referred to by the caller, and the selection result address (the leading address of the normal symbol low probability per unit determination table or the normal symbol high probability per unit determination) is stored in the HL register. Table top address) is set.

  Protection registers (registers whose values do not change in this module) are a BC register and a DE register.

  The first “ADDWB HL, A” is a process of adding the selection offset to the selected address, and the value of the A register is added to the lower byte of the HL register.

  The next “LD A, (HL)” is a process of adding offset data to the addition result address, and adds the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register to the data of the A register.

  The next “ADDWB HL, A” is a process of adding offset data to the addition result address, and the value of the A register is added to the lower byte of the HL register.

  The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

[Description of the program]
The double-byte selection process is called in a state where the start address (HL register) and the first offset value (state offset, A register) of the data table in which the second offsets are arranged are set. After the first offset value (A register) is added to the head address (HL register) of the data table, the second offset value stored at the address indicated by the added value is further added to obtain the target data table Can be obtained.
The double byte selection process is used to reduce the amount of program data used in the gaming machine.

  The double byte selection process is used, for example, when one of a plurality of tables is selected and it is desired to acquire the head address of the selected table.

  The double byte selection process may be arranged in the restart area and called by the RST instruction, or may be arranged in an area other than the restart area and called by the CALL instruction.

Here, the double-byte selection processing program can be modified as follows.
(First line of the program) "RST BYTESEL"
This process is a process for calling the byte data selection process.
(2nd line of the program) “ADDWB HL, A”
This process is a process of adding the lower byte of the HL register and the byte of the A register.
(3rd line of the program) “RET”
This process is a process for returning to the caller.

  The modified double-byte selection processing program can execute the same processing contents as the embodiment, and the execution time is not as improved as the embodiment, but the execution time is shorter than that of the comparative example program. In addition, the use capacity of the program can be suppressed as compared with the program of the embodiment.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an arrangement example of a normal symbol per-selection determination table, a normal symbol low-probability per-time determination table, and a normal symbol high-probability per-time determination table.

  In the present embodiment, three tables (ordinary symbol determination selection table, normal symbol low probability time determination table and normal symbol high probability time determination table) are arranged as follows for the tables used for the normal game lottery. Has been. The address value is merely an example.

  A normal symbol determination selection table (D_JDG_FHT) in which the second offset values are collected is arranged at addresses 1200H to 1201H.

  A normal symbol low probability per hour determination table (D_JDG_FHT_L) is arranged at addresses 1202H to 1205H.

  The normal symbol high probability per hour determination table (D_JDG_FHT_H) is arranged at addresses 1206H to 1209H.

  At address 1200H, D_JDG_FHT (label) is arranged, and “02” is stored as data. The contents of the data are offset to the address (D_JDG_FHT_L) of the determination table at low probability (non-time shortened state) (02H = 1202H-1200H) (second offset used at low probability).

  In the address 1201H, “05” is stored as data, and the content of the data becomes an offset (05H = 1206H-1201H) to the address (D_JDG_FHT_H) of the determination table at the time of high probability (time reduction state) (high probability). A second offset, sometimes used).

  D_JDG_FHT_L (label) is arranged at the address 1202H, “0100” is stored as the data at the addresses 1202H and 1203H, and the content of the data is the lower limit value (1) when the probability is low.

  At addresses 1204H and 1205H, “0100” is stored as data, and the content of the data is the upper limit value (1) when the probability is low.

  D_JDG_FHT_H (label) is arranged at the address 1206H, “0100” is stored as the data at the addresses 1206H and 1207H, and the content of the data becomes the hit lower limit value (1) at the time of high probability.

  At addresses 1208H and 1209H, “FFFF” is stored as data, and the content of the data is the upper limit value (65535) at the time of high probability.

  For example, when it is desired to execute a normal symbol lottery with a high probability (time shortening state), 1200H (the first address of the table summarizing the offset values) is set in the HL register, and 01H is set in the A register. In the state, the double byte selection process (FIG. 73) is called.

  In the double byte selection process, in (1) in FIG. 73, the value of the A register is first added to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes 1201H.

  Next, in (2) in FIG. 73, the data stored at address 1201H is read into the A register.

  Finally, in (3) in FIG. 73, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register. The calculation result is 1201H + 5H = 1206H, which is the final value of the HL register. This value is the head address of the normal symbol high probability hourly determination table (D_JDG_FHT_H), and the caller is referred to the head address of the normal symbol high probability hourly determination table while referring to the head address of the normal symbol high probability hourly determination table. Make a decision.

[Summary of double-byte selection processing]
In this way, the double byte selection process (address calculation module) performs the first addition value data (state offset value, special symbol state flag value) of the first register (A register) and the second register (HL register). First address data (second added value data (normal symbol low probability per hour determination table offset to the top address or normal symbol high probability) when basic address data (ordinary symbol per symbol selection start table) is added Data of the address where the offset to the top address of the hit determination table) is stored, and the second added value data (second offset) stored at the address indicated by the first address data is loaded, The loaded second addition value data is added to the first address data to obtain the second address data (ordinary symbol low probability time determination test). It calculates a head address) of the start address or the normal symbol high probability when per determination table Bull. The main controller 70 includes a double byte selection process (address calculation module).

  In addition, the double byte selection processing uses the addition instruction for adding the data of the first register (A register) and the data of the second register (HL register) by one instruction, and uses the first address data or the second address. Calculate the data.

  Further, in the double-byte selection process, a difference value (state offset, first offset) is set as an argument in the first register (A register), and a data table (normal symbol) is stored in the second register (HL register). Called with the head address of the hit determination selection table) set.

  Furthermore, in the double-byte selection process, second address data (the top address of the normal symbol low probability per hour determination table or the top address of the normal symbol high probability per hour determination table) is set as a return value.

  A plurality of double byte selection processes are stored in a data table (a data table in which a normal symbol per-selection determination table, a normal symbol low-probability per-time determination table, and a normal symbol high-probability per-time determination table are combined into one table). A process of selecting one table from the tables and calculating the start address of the selected table (the start address of the normal symbol low probability hourly determination table or the normal symbol high probability hourly determination table). Run.

  In addition, the data table referred to by the double byte selection process (a data table in which the normal symbol per unit determination selection table, the normal symbol low probability per unit determination table, and the normal symbol high probability per unit determination table) is used as an argument. The basic address of the received HL register is the top address, and the second addition value data (offset to the top address of the normal symbol low probability per hour determination table or offset to the top address of the normal symbol high probability per hour determination table) Next, the second address data (the top address of the normal symbol low probability per hour determination table or the top address of the normal symbol high probability per hour determination table) is arranged.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a program (comparative example) for double-byte selection processing.
The double-byte selection process of the comparative example is a process of calling the byte data selection process twice and then returning, and this part of the process is 3 bytes, but for the remaining 5 bytes that normally becomes a free area Is used as the second half of another module (state offset acquisition processing: CONDOS).

The first “RST BYTESEL” is a process for calling a byte data selection process.
The next “RST BYTESEL” is a process for calling a byte data selection process.
The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

The next “CONDOS_10:” is a label indicating the jump destination in the latter half of the state offset acquisition process.
The next “XOR H” is a process of exclusive ORing a special symbol state flag (a flag indicating whether or not the time is short) and a special symbol probability state flag (a flag indicating whether or not the probability is changed).
The next “ADD A, H” and the next “ADD A, H” are processes for calculating the state offset.
The next “POP HL” is a process for restoring the HL register.
The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

  In the comparative example program, there was no idea of completing the processing in the double-byte selection processing and not writing the program of another module, so the program capacity increased.

  On the other hand, the program example of this embodiment reduces the program capacity of the double-byte selection process by using a new idea that the process is completed in the double-byte selection process and a program of another module is not described. ing. In the program example of this embodiment, in order to prioritize the operation speed, the byte data selection process is not called.

  In the program of the embodiment, “ADDWB HL, A” is “1 byte”, “LD A, (HL)” is “1 byte”, “ADDWB HL, A” is “1 byte”, “RET” is “1 byte”, and the total program capacity is “4 bytes”.

  On the other hand, in the program of the comparative example, “RST BYTESEL” is “1 byte”, “RST BYTESEL” is “1 byte”, and “RET” is “1 byte”. Yes, the total program capacity is “3 bytes”.

When the embodiment is compared with the comparative example, the program capacity of the module is increased by “1 byte”.
However, when the embodiment and the comparative example are compared, the required number of states in the embodiment is 25 states, the required number of states in the comparative example is 80 states, and the processing speed (program execution speed) is greatly increased (68 .75%) can be improved.

  As described above, in the double byte selection process of the embodiment, the second half of the state offset acquisition process (CONDOSFS) is not arranged in the empty area of the RST area. This is because the frequency of use of the state offset acquisition process (CONDOS) is reduced and the state offset acquisition process (CONDOS) is no longer placed in the RST area.

[Winning frequency abnormality error judgment processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a winning frequency abnormality error determination process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  The winning frequency abnormality error determination process is a process called in the state management process (S210 in FIG. 14). When the word counter subtraction process is executed in the winning frequency abnormality error determination process, for example, in order to count the number of timer interruptions corresponding to one minute in the case of determining “error if there are N or more winnings in one minute” use.

  Step S7100: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading a winning frequency abnormality error counter. The winning frequency abnormality error counter is a variable that counts the number of winning prizes that become abnormal winnings.

  Step S7102: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming a winning frequency abnormality error counter.

  Step S7104: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the value of the winning frequency abnormality error counter is less than the number of winning frequency abnormality error detected balls. The value of the winning frequency abnormality error detected ball number is set in advance such as a period constant (for example, five).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the winning frequency abnormality error counter is less than the number of winning frequency abnormality error detected balls (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S7116.
On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the value of the winning frequency abnormality error counter is less than the number of winning frequency abnormality error detected balls (No), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S7106.

  Step S7106: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for saving the address of the winning frequency abnormality error counter.

  Step S7108: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for saving the address of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer.

  Step S7110: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for calling a security setting process. Although the contents of the security setting process are omitted, in brief, processing related to security (subcommand generation / transmission processing, security timer setting processing, error state setting and cancellation processing, etc.) is executed.

  Step S7112: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for restoring the address of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer.

  Step S7114: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for restoring the address of the winning frequency abnormality error counter. When this process is finished, the main control CPU 72 executes step S7120.

  Step S7116: The main control CPU 72 executes a process for calling a word counter subtraction process. Details of the processing will be described later.

  Step S7118: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the value of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer is not zero. Although not particularly illustrated, the initial value (for example, 1 minute) of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer may be set in advance by the upper module or may be set by this module.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the value of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer is not 0 (No), that is, if it is confirmed that the value of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer is 0, the main control CPU 72 executes step S7120. Run.

  Step S7120: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the winning frequency abnormality error counter.

Step S7122: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the winning opening winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer value in the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer. By executing this process, the winning mouth winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer value is reset.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

[Word counter subtraction processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the word counter subtraction process.
The word counter subtraction process is a process for handling a counter value (for example, a 2-byte counter value (word counter, word data)) that does not fit in one byte.

  Step S7200: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the word data before subtraction is zero.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the word data before subtraction is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the word data before subtraction is 0 (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the word data before subtraction is 1 or more, the main control CPU 72 executes step S7202.

  Step S7202: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the word data.

  Step S7204: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the word data after subtraction is not zero.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the word data after subtraction is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.
On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the word data after subtraction is not 0 (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the word data after subtraction is 0, the main control CPU 72 executes step S7206.

Step S7206: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting a carry flag.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a winning frequency abnormality error determination processing program.

  In the figure, the first three instructions correspond to a winning frequency abnormality error counter confirmation process. The next six instructions correspond to a winning frequency abnormality error process. The next two commands correspond to a winning frequency abnormality monitoring timer confirmation process. The last two commands correspond to a winning frequency abnormal error related setting process.

  The first “LD A, (BC)” is a process of loading the winning frequency abnormality error counter, and the data stored at the address indicated by the BC register is loaded into the A register. The address indicated by the BC register stores the value of the winning frequency abnormality error counter. Note that the value of the BC register is set in the upper module.

  The next “CP D” is a process of confirming the prize frequency abnormality error counter, and compares the value indicated by the D register with the value indicated by the A register. If the value of the winning frequency abnormality error counter is less than the number of winning frequency abnormality error detected balls (if A <D), the carry flag (C) is set.

  The next "JR C, NHI_CHK_10" is a process that branches if the number of winning frequency abnormal error detected balls is less than, and jumps to "NHI_CHK_10: (label)" if the carry flag (C) is set.

  The next “PUSH BC” is a process of saving the address of the winning frequency abnormality error counter, and saves the value of the BC register.

  The next “PUSH HL” is a process of saving the address of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer, and saves the value of the HL register.

  The next “RST SEC_SET” is a process for calling a security setting process arranged in the restart area.

  The next “POP HL” is a process for restoring the address of the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer.

  The next “POP BC” is a process for restoring the address of the winning frequency abnormality error counter.

  The next “JR NHI_CHK — 20” is a process of jumping to “NHI_CHK — 20: (label)”.

  The next “CALLF WORDDEC” is a process for calling the word counter subtraction process.

  The next “RET NTZ” is a process that returns if the winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer is not 0, and returns to the caller if the second zero flag is not 0. Note that the second zero flag is determined when the following second example program of the word counter subtraction process is employed, and the following first example program of the word counter subtraction process is employed. If so, the zero flag is set as the judgment target.

  The next “CLR (BC)” is a process of clearing the winning frequency abnormality error counter, and clears the data stored at the address indicated by the BC register.

  The next "LDW (HL), @TMR_CHK_PZF" is a process for saving a winning mouth winning frequency error error monitoring timer value in the winning frequency error error monitoring timer, and the data stored in the address indicated by the BC register A winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer value (@TMR_CHK_PZF, for example, a value corresponding to one minute) is loaded.

  The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

[Description of the program]
Here, a method of using the word counter subtraction process in the winning frequency abnormality error determination process will be described.
The winning frequency abnormality error determination process is one of the processes executed in the timer interrupt process (in the state management process).

When the winning frequency abnormal error determination process is called, the address of the winning frequency abnormal error monitoring timer or the like is set in advance in each register (input register).
In the prize frequency abnormality error monitoring timer, the number of timer interruptions corresponding to one minute is set in advance. Each time the timer is interrupted, the word counter subtraction process is called at (1) in FIG. 78 and the value is subtracted. If one minute has not elapsed, the process returns to the caller at (2) in FIG. When one minute has elapsed or when a winning frequency abnormality error has occurred, the counter for counting the number of winnings is cleared in (3) in FIG. 78, and the timer for one minute is reset in (4) in FIG.
The above is an example of the caller of the word counter subtraction process.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a word counter subtraction program (first example).

  The input register (argument) is set by the caller, and the subtraction target ram address is set in the HL register.

  The output register (return value) is set by this module and is referred to by the caller. The update result flag is set in the zero flag of the F register, and the update result flag is set in the carry flag of the F register.

  Protection registers (registers whose values do not change in this module) are a BC register and an HL register.

  The first “JTW Z, (HL), WORDDEC — 99” is a process for branching if the word data before subtraction is 0, and data stored in the address indicated by the HL register (for example, a winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer) ) Is 0, the zero flag (Z) is set, and if the zero flag is set, the process jumps to “WORDDEC_99: (label)”.

  The next “DECW (HL)” is a process of subtracting word data, and 1 is subtracted from the data (winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer) stored at the address indicated by the HL register.

  The next “JTW NZ, (HL), WORDDEC — 99” is a process of returning if the word data after subtraction is not 0.

  The next “SCF” is a process for setting a carry flag.

  The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

[Description of the program]
The word counter subtraction process is a module that does nothing if the 2-byte RWM value specified by the HL register is 0 (0000H), and subtracts 1 if it is not 0 (0001H to FFFFH). When the value after subtraction changes from 1 (0001H) to 0 (0000H), a carry flag is set as a flag indicating the change.

The “JTW instruction” used in (1) and (3) in FIG. 79 is an instruction that branches depending on whether 16-bit data is 0 or not.
In the program instructions, there is no instruction that returns depending on whether 16-bit data is 0 or not. In order to do so, it is necessary to branch by the “JTW instruction” and execute a return instruction at the branch destination as in this example program.

  In (1) in FIG. 79, the “JTW instruction” is used to determine whether the 16-bit value written in the RWM (and the next RWM) specified by the HL register is 0 or not.

  If the value of the word data is 0, the zero flag is set. Otherwise, the zero flag is reset. The carry flag is always reset. If the zero flag is set, the process proceeds to the label “WORDDEC_99”, and if it is reset, the process proceeds to the next instruction.

  In the “DECW (HL)” instruction (2) in FIG. 79, 1 is subtracted from the 16-bit value written in the RWM (and the next RWM) specified by the HL register. When the result of subtraction becomes 0, the second zero flag is set. Otherwise, the second zero flag is reset. Note that the values of the zero flag and the carry flag do not change regardless of the result.

In the module of the first example, a zero flag is set as to whether or not the 16-bit value is 0, and is returned to the caller. In order to realize this, in (3) in FIG. 79, the “JTW instruction” is executed once more, and whether or not the 16-bit value is 0 is reflected in the zero flag.
If the updated 16-bit value is not 0, the zero flag is reset, and the process proceeds to “WORDDEC_99”. If the updated 16-bit value is 0, the zero flag is set and the process proceeds to the next instruction.

  After all, only when the 16-bit value is changed from 1 to 0, the “SCF instruction” of (4) in FIG. 79 is executed and the carry flag is set. In other cases, the carry flag is returned to the caller while being reset by the “JTW instruction” in (1) or (3) in FIG.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a program (second example) of word counter subtraction processing.

  The input register (argument) is set by the caller, and the subtraction target ram address is set in the HL register.

  The output register (return value) is set by this module and referenced by the caller. The update result flag is set in the second zero flag of the F register, and the update result flag is set in the carry flag of the F register. The

  Protection registers (registers whose values do not change in this module) are a BC register and an HL register.

  The first “JTW Z, (HL), WORDDEC — 99” is a process for branching if the word data before subtraction is 0, and data stored in the address indicated by the HL register (for example, a winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer) ) Is 0, the zero flag (Z) is set, and if the zero flag is set, the process jumps to “WORDDEC_99: (label)”.

  The next “DECW (HL)” is a process of subtracting word data, and subtracts 1 from data stored in the address indicated by the HL register (for example, a winning frequency abnormality error monitoring timer).

  The next “RET NTZ” is a process of returning if the word data after subtraction is not 0. This process is different from the program of the first example.

  The next “SCF” is a process for setting a carry flag.

  The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

[Description of the program]
In (1) in FIG. 80, it is determined whether the 2-byte data indicated by the HL register is 0000H. Internally, 2-byte data is compared with 0000H, and the carry flag is reset regardless of the data value. Only when the value of the 2-byte data is 0000H, the zero flag is set, jumps to “WORDDEC — 99”, and returns to the caller as it is. It should be noted that “I want to return if the value of 2-byte data is 0000H”, but there is no such instruction.
In the JTW instruction, the second zero flag (TZ) changes in the same manner as the zero flag (Z). Therefore, if the value of the 2-byte data is 0000H, the process returns to the caller with the second zero flag set.

On the other hand, if the 2-byte data is not 0000H, the process proceeds to (2) in FIG.
In (2) in FIG. 80, 1 is subtracted from 2-byte data. In this instruction, the zero flag and the carry flag do not change, but the second zero flag changes. When the 2-byte data is changed from 0001H to 0000H, the second zero flag is set. In other cases, the second zero flag is reset.

  In (3) in FIG. 80, the second zero flag is confirmed, and if it is reset, the process returns to the caller. Only when the 2-byte data changes from 0001H to 0000H, the process proceeds to (4) in FIG. 80, and the carry flag is set by the “SCF instruction”.

[Comparison between the first example and the second example]
In the program of the second example, the flag (return value) returned to the parent module (calling module) is changed from the zero flag to the second zero flag.
For this reason, the part (3) in FIG. 80 is different in processing from the program of the first example, and is a “RET NTZ” instruction. In FIG. 80 (3), whether to return or not is determined according to the content of the second zero flag.
Only when the 16-bit value changes from 1 to 0, the carry flag is set in (4) in FIG. 80, and in other cases, the carry module is reset in (1) in FIG. Return to.

  The word counter subtraction process may be arranged in the restart area and called by the RST instruction, or may be arranged in an area other than the restart area and called by the CALL instruction.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the relationship between the RWM value and the flag when calling the word counter subtraction process.

[0000H]
When the RWM value before subtraction (data indicated by the subtraction target ram address) is “0000H”, the RWM value after subtraction is “0000H”. The second zero flag is set (TZ) and the carry flag is reset (NC).

[0001H]
When the value of the RWM before subtraction is “0001H”, the value of the RWM after subtraction is “0000H”. The second zero flag is set (TZ) and the carry flag is set (C).

[0002H]
When the value of the RWM before subtraction is “0002H”, the value of the RWM after subtraction is “0001H”. The second zero flag is reset (NTZ), and the carry flag is reset (NC).

[0003H or higher]
When the value of RWM before subtraction is “0003H or more”, the value of RWM after subtraction is “a value obtained by subtracting 1 from a value of 0003H or more”. The second zero flag is reset (NTZ), and the carry flag is reset (NC).

  Here, the second zero flag is a flag different from the zero flag. The second zero flag also changes for an instruction whose zero flag does not change. For example, when a load instruction (“LD A, 0”) is executed, the zero flag does not change, but the second zero flag is set (changes). Although the second zero flag is convenient, the contents of the flag change even with a simple load instruction. After setting the second zero flag, use the second zero flag for determination without executing any other instruction. Is preferred.

[Summary of word counter subtraction processing]
In this way, the word counter subtraction process (arithmetic processing module) performs arithmetic processing (1) on the specified data (subtraction target data) stored at the address indicated by the specified register (HL register) having the specified number of bits (16 bits). A subtraction module that determines whether or not the specified data is a special value (0) before executing the arithmetic process, and if the result is a special value, the special flag (Zero flag) is set, and processing is executed using a branch instruction (JTW instruction) that branches (jumps) to a position where no arithmetic processing is executed when a special flag is set. It is determined whether or not to do. The main controller 70 includes a word counter subtraction process (arithmetic processing module).

  In addition, the word counter subtraction process is performed using an operation instruction (DECW instruction) that calculates word data (specified data) stored at the address indicated by the specified register (HL register) with a single instruction. .

  Further, the word counter subtraction process is called in a state where the address of the area where the specified data is stored in the specified register (HL register) is set as an argument.

  Furthermore, the word counter subtraction process returns a special flag (eg, zero flag of bit 6 of the F register or second bit of bit 5 of the F register) to a special register (F register) different from the specified register (HL register) as a return value. A value of a special flag (for example, a carry flag of bit 0 of the F register) indicating the result of the arithmetic processing is set.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a program (comparative example) for byte counter subtraction processing.

The first “PUSH HL” is a process of saving the HL register.
The next “LDE, (HL)” is a process of acquiring lower byte data from the subtraction target ram.
The next “INC HL” is a process for setting the upper byte data storage address.
The next “LD D, (HL)” is a process of acquiring upper byte data from the subtraction target ram.
The next “LD A, E” and “OR D” are processes for confirming the word data before subtraction.
The next “JR Z, WORDDEC — 10” is a process that branches if the word data before subtraction is 0.

The next “DEC DE” is a process of subtracting 1 from the word data.
The next “LD (HL), D” is a process of saving the upper byte of the word data in the subtraction target ram.
The next “DEC HL” is a process for setting the data storage address of the lower byte.
The next “LD (HL), E” is a process of saving the lower byte of the word data in the subtraction target ram.
The next “LD A, E” and “OR D” are processes for confirming the word data after 1 subtraction.
The next “JR NZ, WORDDEC — 10” is a process for branching if the word data after 1 subtraction is not 0.
The next “SCF” is a process for setting a carry flag.

The next “WORDDEC — 10:” is a jump destination label.
The next “POP HL” is a process for restoring the HL register.
The next “RET” is processing for returning to the caller.

  In the word counter subtraction process of the comparative example, when it is determined whether the data of 2 bytes is 0, the logical sum of the upper byte and the lower byte is taken and the determination is made based on whether the result of the logical sum is 0. In order to check whether the DE register is 0000H, the “LD A, E” instruction and the “OR D” instruction are combined. Further, even after subtracting data, it is necessary to return the upper byte and the lower byte separately, which increases the processing. Further, as to whether or not the update result is zero, since the second zero flag does not exist in the conventional CPU, the zero flag is used.

  In the first example program, “JTW Z, (HL), WORDDEC_99” is “3 bytes”, “DECW (HL)” is “2 bytes”, and “JTW NZ, (HL), WORDDEC_99” is “3 bytes”, “SCF” is “2 bytes”, “RET” is “1 byte”, and the total program capacity is “11 bytes”.

  In the second example program, “JTW Z, (HL), WORDDEC_99” is “3 bytes”, “DECW (HL)” is “2 bytes”, and “RET NTZ” is “1 byte”. , “SCF” is “2 bytes”, “RET” is “1 byte”, and the total program capacity is “9 bytes”.

  On the other hand, in the program of the comparative example, “PUSH HL” is “1 byte”, “LDE, (HL)” is “1 byte”, “INC HL” is “1 byte”, and “LD “D, (HL)” is “1 byte”, “LD A, E” is “1 byte”, “OR D” is “1 byte”, and “JR Z, WORDDEC — 10” is “2 bytes”. "DEC DE" is "1 byte", "LD (HL), D" is "1 byte", "DEC HL" is "1 byte", "LD (HL), “E” is “1 byte”, “LD A, E” is “1 byte”, “ORD” is “1 byte”, “JR NZ, WORDDEC — 10” is “2 bytes”, “SCF” is “2 bytes”, “POP HL” is “1 byte” , And the is a "RET" is "1 byte", the program capacity of the total is "20 bytes".

  When comparing the first example and the comparative example, the program capacity of the module is reduced by “9 bytes”. When the second example and the comparative example are compared, the program capacity of the module is reduced by “11 bytes”.

[Game Flow (Part 1)]
FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a game flow that is developed when a winning is obtained in the first special symbol lottery in the normal mode.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode. In the “normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “low probability state” (low probability non-time shortened state). [F1] In the normal mode, when the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to change and the game proceeds.

  [F1] In the normal mode, when the big hit of [F2] “13 round normal symbol 1” is won, the big hit game corresponding to the winning symbol is executed, and after the big hit game ends, the mode shifts to the [F3] coast mode.

  [F3] In the coast mode, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “high probability state” (low probability time reduction state). [F3] In the coast mode, if the result of winning is not obtained, [F4] If the special symbol fluctuates 100 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  [F1] In normal mode, [F5] “16 round probability variation 1”, “13 round probability variation 1”, “13 round probability variation 2”, “7 round probability variation 1”, “4 round probability variation 1” When the big hit is won, the big hit game corresponding to the winning symbol is executed, and after the big hit game is finished, the process shifts to [F6] fireworks rush.

  [F6] In the fireworks rush, the winning probability of the special symbol is “high probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “high probability state” (high probability time shortening state). [F6] In the fireworks rush, the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes are set to 10,000, so the fireworks rush continues substantially until the next big hit.

[Game Flow (Part 2)]
FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a game flow that is developed when a winning is obtained in the second special symbol lottery in the fireworks rush or coast mode.

  [F3] In the coast mode or [F6] Fireworks rush, [G1] If you win a big hit of “7 round normal symbol 1”, a big hit game is executed according to the winning symbol, and after the big hit game ends, [F3] Transition to coast mode.

  On the other hand, in [F3] coast mode or [F6] fireworks rush, [G2] “16 round probability variation 2”, “16 round probability variation 3”, “13 round probability variation 3”, “10 round probability variation 1” When winning the big hit of “7 round probability variation 2” and “7 round probability variation 3”, the big hit game corresponding to the winning symbol is executed, and after the big hit game is finished, it shifts to [F6] fireworks rush.

  Note that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all of the game flow.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit and blinking display by 7-segment LED, the appealing power is not good. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 85 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect image corresponding to the change display and stop display of the special symbol. Note that, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
FIG. 85 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to change (a state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

[Memory display effect]
Further, in the pre-change display area X1 at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (represented by reference numerals M1 and M2 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. Each of the markers M1 and M2 represents the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays increases or decreases in conjunction with the change in the number of operating memories during the game.

  In addition, for the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (◯) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed with the shape. In the example shown in the figure, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (shown by broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (memory display effect).

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the diagram) is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” that follow the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed variably in synchronism with the variability display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “16 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, red display color).

[Variable display production start]
85 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the first special symbol, the change display effect is started by the scroll change of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (the symbol effect). Execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. The markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-fluctuation display area X1 of the band-like portion in the lower part of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of change, but are displayed in the lower left part of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of change. The display moves to the changing display area X2 based on the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (stored image display maintenance effect). In the figure, the effect symbol variation display is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the time reduction function is inactive and the probability variation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing the display color.

[Left design stop]
FIG. 85 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect design representing the number “8” is stopped at the left position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 85, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, the number of markers M1 displayed is linked accordingly. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (oldest) memory number display in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effects consumed by the internal lottery are combined. Done. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol even in the production.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 85, since the marker M1 at the head in the storage order moves to the changing display area X2, the display in the pre-change display area X1 becomes three. There is an effect in which the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (here, leftward) by one. As a result, the front-rear relationship of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the production, and the fact that the working memory is consumed and reduced by one for the player or that the working memory is consumed and the special symbol Can be taught intuitively and intelligibly.

[Right production symbol stop]
85 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops changing thereafter. In this example, the effect design representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 85: The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has been moved to the changing display area X2 and has been continuously displayed is also hidden. Therefore, it can be intuitively and easily instructed to the player that “the variation of the special symbol has ended”.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  Moreover, although the example mentioned above is a thing at the time of non-winning, after a reach effect is performed during a variable display effect at the time of a big hit (winning), an effect design is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 86 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of reach production (super reach production) executed at the time of big hit (winning). Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  The following reach effects are, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs a variation display based on the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, and then the first special symbol has a big hit (for example, “Self”, “Yo” of the 7-segment LED) , “Mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc.), and so on (reach effect execution means). Note that, in FIG. 86, each effect symbol is simplified to be a number only. Further, the markers M1 and M2, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the pre-change display area X1 and the display area X2 during change are not shown (the same applies to the following drawings). Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
86A: For example, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from the top) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. The variable display effect is started by scrolling down.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
86 (B): Next, in a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses step by step from the first step to a plurality of steps (for example, the second to fifth steps) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
86 (C): After the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change in the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further from the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 86 (B). It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
86 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped before long. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
86 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the right position of the screen, so that a reach state of “5”-“being changed”-“5” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
86 (F): After a reach state has occurred, for example, a notice effect after the reach occurrence (first time) is performed in which images representing “heart” figures form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice presentation effect after the visually lively reach notice occurrence, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of reach production]
86 (G): Following the notice effect after the occurrence of the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the number “5” is left as it is without being erased. If the number “4” is erased and “5” remains in front of the screen, it means “big hit”, and if the number “5” is also erased, it means “out of place”. In the case of a loss, for example, the number “6” is displayed on the screen after the number “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, and “4”, the player's tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the production progresses with the number “4” actually being erased on the screen and the number “5” remaining on the screen, the possibility of a “hit” increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 86 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it was split into a large image, and the content that the character emits some dialogue (or silently) (The content may be that of smiling). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases” as it is ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As another reach effect different from the above, for example, there is a development that “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”are erased, and if the number“ 5 ”is left unerased at the end, it is a big hit” ”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “the jackpot may be close soon” can be obtained.

[Stop display effect]
86 (I): Then, the last medium effect symbol stops. In this example, the effect symbol representing “5” is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen, so that it is possible to convey to the player that the game is a big hit.

  86 (J): Then, for example, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed on the effect. In other words, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, it can be made undisclosed to the player as to which winning symbol is won.

  If the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol that is the subject of change this time is stopped and displayed as a missing symbol, so that the effect symbol is similarly stopped and displayed in a shifted manner. In this case, by displaying the numbers “4” and “6” other than “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Examples of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 87 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of fireworks rush. This fireworks rush is a mode that is shifted to after a big hit game in the case of winning “any of the probable symbols”. Fireworks rush is a state with high probability time reduction. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  FIG. 87 (A): For example, after the big hit game with “any of the probable symbols” ends, the special symbol variation display is performed, so that the production symbol variation display is performed in the “fireworks rush” state. Yes. In order to deeply impress the player with the fireworks motif, the background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 87 (B): Since the first change (when not winning) after the end of the big hit game, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  87 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the big hit game is finished. In the fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state), the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated. Therefore, as long as the player continues to make a right stroke, the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Fluctuation display is often performed. In addition, if a winning result is obtained in the fireworks rush, a reach effect is executed and it is a big hit.

[Example of coast mode production]
FIG. 88 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the coast mode effect. This coast mode is a mode that is shifted to after the end of the big hit game in the case of any one of the normal symbols. The coast mode is a “low probability time reduction state”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  FIG. 88 (A): For example, after the big hit game with “any of the normal symbols” ends, the special symbols change display is performed, so that the effect symbols change display is performed in the “coast mode” state. ing. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with motifs of images such as “sand beach”, “sea”, and “mountain” in order to express the healing impression that is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed on the upper left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  88 (B): Since the current variation (at the time of non-winning) is completed, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 88: The next fluctuation is started. This coast mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without obtaining a winning result. When the coast mode ends, the normal mode with a low probability non-time reduction state is entered. If a winning result is obtained in the coast mode, a reach effect is executed and a big hit is achieved.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effects, stop display effects, reach effects, notice effects, effects related to the stored image, and big-game effects are all controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a variation pattern destination determination command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, and a (special symbol) decrease in the operating memory number. Time effect command, start opening winning tone control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, end of jackpot There are a production command, a count cut counter value command, a stop display time end command, a prize ball content command, a model command, an opening designation command, and the like.

  Step S401: In the action memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls execution of the memory display effect using the markers M1 and M2 (memory display effect executing means). The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, or at the time of the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. The contents of effects are controlled (effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 gives the sound drive circuit 134 the effect contents (for example, BGM during the variable display effect, the reach effect, the mode transition effect, the big hit effect, the winning during the big hit effect) Time sound effect, voice data, etc.). Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of moving the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery from the pre-change display area X1 to the changing display area X2. The stored marker moved to the changing display area X2 is erased when the change ends.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 89).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is performed when the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning variable variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 26) or the small winning variable variable winning device management process (FIG. 26). When the middle step S6000) is selected, it is selected as a jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the reach other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (effect execution means) ). In addition, at the time of a small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in a manner similar to or close to the loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit (special game effect executing means). In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of 16 round big hits, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 16-round big role effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). . As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 89) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 89). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), changes the effect schedule (change time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, and stops. The display mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of hitting the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the big hit time effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit time stop symbol.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of losing is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, and reach occurrence) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.).

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). The notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 91), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern.

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. The variable winning device operation process is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operation in-process (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). This is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the variable winning device operating process will be described along each process.

  Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S904 to S908) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device activation pre-processing has not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device activation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. Further, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908) as the next jump destination.

  Step S904: In the variable winning device pre-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, in the case of “any of the normal symbols”, a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. If it falls under “any of the probable symbols”, a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed.

  Step S906: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switch button 45 during execution of the big hit effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and the content of the effect (button effect) according to the result is monitored. The control information is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S908: In the variable winning device post-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of transmitting the transfer destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control CPU 126 executes a coast mode entry effect according to the winning symbol, or executes a fireworks rush entry effect. For example, if any of the probability variation symbols is met, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the fireworks rush is entered is executed. If any of the normal symbols is met, the coast mode is entered. The process which selects the production to show is performed.
When the above process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 91).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, the main controller 70 stores the launch position designation command in the launch position designation command without changing the value of the launch position designation flag, and transmits the launch position designation command to the effect control apparatus 124. Compared with the conventional method of storing the firing position designation command after changing the value of the firing position designation flag, the process of generating the firing position designation command can be simplified. Capacity can be reduced.

(2) According to the present embodiment, when it is determined that a game ball should be fired in the right-handed area (second game area), a value for specifying the firing position designation lamp 38f in the firing position designation flag (In order to set (20H), the value for specifying the firing position designation lamp 38f can be used as it is for the firing position designation command, and the control processing is simplified by unifying the set values, and the capacity of the main controller 70 is increased. Can be reduced.

(3) According to the present embodiment, since the launch position designation command is transmitted when the main controller 70 is turned on or the value of the launch position designation flag changes, the minimum necessary launch position designation command can be transmitted. In addition to simplifying the control process at the time of transmission, the capacity of the main controller 70 can be reduced as a result.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of appearance and various numerical values given in the embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the above-described contents.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation area has been described. However, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation area.

  In the embodiment described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that does not employ “simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol” has been described. However, the present invention can be applied.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to a so-called loop type (a type in which a substantial upper limit is not set for the probability variation number) is described as an example. The present invention may be applied to a type) gaming machine.

  Although the control device has been described in the example of the main control device 70, the payout control device 92 and the effect control device 124 may be used. Moreover, although the gaming machine has been described as an example of a pachinko machine, it may be a slot machine.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation | movement memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (3)

It has a control device that controls the game,
The controller is
According to the progress of the game, it is determined whether to shoot a game ball in the first game area or a second game area different from the first game area, and use the determined content as a launch position designation flag. Firing position designation flag setting means to be set;
A gaming machine comprising: a firing position designation information transmitting means for storing the firing position designation information in a firing position designation information without changing the value, and transmitting the firing position designation information to a control device different from the control device. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The controller is
When the value of the launch position designation flag is a special value, it comprises launch position designation display means for displaying an aspect indicating that a game ball should be launched into the second game area,
The launch position designation flag setting means includes
When it is determined that a game ball should be fired in the second game area, a value for specifying the launch position designation display means is set in the launch position designation flag. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The launch position designation information transmitting means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the launch position designation information is transmitted when the control device is turned on or when the value of the launch position designation flag changes.